Nokia Solutions and Networks T5EJ1 1X SC480 BTS Microcell Base Station Transmitter User Manual print instructions

Nokia Solutions and Networks 1X SC480 BTS Microcell Base Station Transmitter print instructions

User Manual Part 1

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	430567
Application ID	/AskCLjoVx6gTo6dr9luPw==
Document Description	User Manual Part 1
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	271.41kB (3392659 bits)
Date Submitted	2004-06-12 00:00:00
Date Available	2004-06-11 00:00:00
Creation Date	2004-06-11 14:16:23
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2004-06-11 14:17:11
Document Title	print_instructions
Document Author:	Win32 user

Technical
Information
1X SC480 BTS HARDWARE
INSTALLATION, OPTIMIZATION/ATP, AND
FRU
SOFTWARE RELEASE 2.16.4.X
800 MHZ
CDMA2000 1X
PRELIMINARY
ENGLISH
MAY 2004
68P09260A11–7
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from any
inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has been
carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola,
Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to make
changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not
assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey
license under its patent rights or the rights of others.
It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),
programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean
that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrighted
Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and
other countries preserve for Motorola and its licensors certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive
right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any
copyrighted material of Motorola and its licensors contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual
may not be copied, reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or
otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a
product.
Usage and Disclosure Restrictions
License Agreement
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc and its licensors. It is furnished by express license
agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or
documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or
computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.
High Risk Activities
Components, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,
manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safe
controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life
Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied
warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
Trademarks
MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. All other product or service names are
the property of their respective owners.
© Copyright 2003, 2004 Motorola, Inc.
Javat Technology and/or J2MEt: Java and all other Java–based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
UNIXR: UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
REV091302
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
Software Release 2.16.4.X
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xx
FCC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Part 15 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part 68 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiv
xxiv
xxiv
xxv
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxvii
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxix
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Required Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
800 MHz CDMA Frequencies and Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
Installation Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
ATP Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
BTS Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
Outdoor Enclosure Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
Installation and ATP Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-33
Chapter 2: Site Preparation
Site Preparation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Site Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Prepare Site for the Arrival of the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Chapter 3: BTS Cables
MAY 2004
Cable Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Power, Earth Ground, and Battery Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Antenna Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents – continued
Span Line and RGPS Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
Remote GPS Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
Local GPS (RF–GPS) Antenna Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
Chapter 4: BTS and Cabling Installation
Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
Attaching BTS to Mounting Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Thermal Management Enclosure Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
Compact BTS and HMS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-32
Earth Ground Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-46
BTS DC Power Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-53
AC / DC Power Cabling Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-57
Antenna Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-59
Span Line, RGPS, and RF GPS Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-63
Customer Input / Output Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-74
Site Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-76
Installation Completion Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-77
Chapter 5: Power Installation
Frame Configuration DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Pre–Power Up Test (Indoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
AC Power Input (Outdoor Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
Battery Backup DC Power Input (Outdoor Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9
Initial Power–Up Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
Remove Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
Chapter 6: Optimization and Calibration
ii
Preliminary Operations: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Preliminary Operations: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Ethernet LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Preparing the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
Using the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Table of Contents – continued
Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33
Download the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
CSA System Time – GPS & HSO/MSO Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43
Test Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-51
Test Set Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-65
Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-76
Chapter 7: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-11
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-16
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-18
RX FER Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-21
Generating an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-23
Chapter 8: Leave the Site
Updating Calibration Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
Prepare to Leave the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
Chapter 9: Field Replaceable Unit
MAY 2004
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4
High and Medium Stability Oscillator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-7
Global Positioning System (GPS) Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-11
RF–GPS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-14
Power Supply Module (PSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-18
Clock Synchronization Alarms Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-21
Group Line Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-24
Multi–Channel CDMA Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-28
Broadband Transceiver Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-32
Compact BTS Multi–Coupler Preselector Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-36
MCC Data Only (MCC–DO) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-41
Compact BTS Input and Output Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-45
SDCX Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-50
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
iii
Table of Contents – continued
RF Filter Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-55
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-67
TME Power Distribution Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-70
Heat Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-75
Thermal Management Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-83
Power Distribution Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-86
Master Item Number Failure List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-87
Chapter 10: Reference Procedures Performed At OMC–R
Reference Procedures Performed At OMC–R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1
Accessing OMC–R CLI Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3
Circuit BTS Start–Up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-23
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-32
Packet BTS Start–Up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-53
Chapter 11: Basic Troubleshooting
Basic Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
Appendix A: MCC–Data Only
MCC–DO Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Appendix B: Test Equipment Preparation
Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-5
Test Equipment Connection, Testing, and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-17
Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-28
Manual Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-32
Appendix C: Download ROM Code
Downloading ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Appendix D: MMI Cable Fabrication
MMI Cable Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
Appendix E: Multiple BTS Configurations
Compact BTS Expansion Configuration (Indoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
Multiple Compact BTS Configuration (Outdoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-22
Appendix F: Logical BTS Configuration
Logical BTS LAN Configuration for Compact BTS (Indoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
F-1
MAY 2004
Table of Contents – continued
Appendix G: Integrated BTS Router Preliminary Operations
Integrated BTS Router Preliminary Operations – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
Verify GLI3 Software Version and Span Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-2
Change GLI3 Span Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-6
Appendix H: Integrated BTS Router Installation
Integrated BTS Router Installation – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-1
New Packet BTS Installation with IBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-2
BTS Span Connections for IBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-4
BTS Span Connections for IBR – One Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-5
Appendix I: Packet Backhaul Configuration
Packet Backhaul BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-1
Index
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
List of Figures
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
Software Release 2.16.4.X
vi
Figure 1-1: Mounted BTS and Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Figure 1-2: CDMA Frequency Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
Figure 1-3: RS232–IEEE488 Converter Serial Cable Configuration . . . . . . . . .
1-16
Figure 1-4: Front View of Compact BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Figure 1-5: Rear View of Compact BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
Figure 1-6: CCP2 Shelf Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-24
Figure 1-7: CBIO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Figure 1-8: –48 VDC RF Connectors, Circuit Breaker, DC Power Terminal
Strip, and Ground Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
Figure 1-9: +27VDC RF Connectors, Circuit Breaker, DC Power Terminal
Strip, and Ground Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
Figure 1-10: Thermal Managment Enclosure and Heat Manaagement
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
Figure 1-11: Power Distribution Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-31
Figure 1-12: Power Distribution Enclosure and Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-32
Figure 1-13: Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-32
Figure 2-1: Securing Lights with Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Figure 2-2: Wood Shipping Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
Figure 2-3: Cardboard Shipping Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
Figure 2-4: Overall Dimensions of BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
Figure 2-5: cCLPA Dimensions and Functional Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-17
Figure 2-6: Indoor Functional Clearances for BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
Figure 2-7: Indoor Functional Clearances for BTS Side–By–Side
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19
Figure 2-8: TME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
Figure 2-9: Overall Dimensions of the Thermal Management Enclosure . . . . .
2-21
Figure 2-10: Functional Clearances for TME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-22
Figure 2-11: PDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-23
Figure 2-12: PDE Overall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
Figure 2-13: Functional Clearances for PDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
List of Figures – continued
MAY 2004
Figure 2-14: Mulitple Pole Installation and Functional Clearances for
Enclosures and PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-26
Figure 2-15: Multiple Wall Installation and Functional Clearances for
TME and HMS, PDE, and cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-27
Figure 3-1: Antenna Cabling Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Figure 4-1: Rear View of BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
Figure 4-2: Detail of Antenna Connectors and DC Power (Rear of BTS) . . . . .
4-4
Figure 4-3: Attaching Mounting Plate to Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
Figure 4-4: Attaching Mounting Bracket to BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
Figure 4-5: Attaching BTS to Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Figure 4-6: BTS Rear Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
Figure 4-7: Bottom View of cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Figure 4-8: cCLPA Mounting to Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Figure 4-9: cCLPA Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Figure 4-10: DC Power Connection to cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
Figure 4-11: CBIO–to–cCLPA Data Cable RJ45 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
Figure 4-12: Data Cable Connection Diagram for Compact BTS to cCLPA . . .
4-18
Figure 4-13: Pole Mounting BracketAssembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
Figure 4-14: Wall Mounting Bracket and cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
Figure 4-15: Thermal Management Enclosure and Heat Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
Figure 4-16: Bottom View of TME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22
Figure 4-17: Wall Mounting Bracket and Pole Mounting Bracket
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
Figure 4-18: TME Screw Mounting Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27
Figure 4-19: Thermal Management Enclosure and BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
Figure 4-20: Heat Management System (HMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Figure 4-21: HMS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
Figure 4-22: PDE and Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-32
Figure 4-23: PDE Conduit Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-33
Figure 4-24: PDE Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
Figure 4-25: Wall Mounting Bracket and Pole Mounting Bracket
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
Figure 4-26: PDE Mounting Screw Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-38
Figure 4-27: PDE Heat Exchanger Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
Figure 4-28: PDE Heat Exchanger Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-40
Figure 4-29: PDE and Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-41
Figure 4-30: Detail Location of Ground Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-47
Figure 4-31: Grounding Location on BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-48
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
vii
List of Figures – continued
viii
Figure 4-32: Typical Outdoor Grounding Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-50
Figure 4-33: Typical Multiple Outdoor Grounding Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
4-51
Figure 4-34: Rear View of PDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-52
Figure 4-35: DC Power Terminal Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-54
Figure 4-36: TME Power Distribution Assembly for –48VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-55
Figure 4-37: TME Power Distribution Assembly for +27VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-56
Figure 4-38: Antenna Cabling (With cCLPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-60
Figure 4-39: Antenna Cabling with 2 cCLPAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-61
Figure 4-40: Antenna Cabling (Without cCLPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-62
Figure 4-41: Span and RGPS Cabling Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-64
Figure 4-42: Connector Pins Numbering for Cables C and C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-66
Figure 4-43: Installing the Remote GPS Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-68
Figure 4-44: RGPS Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-69
Figure 4-45: RGPS to SC480 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-69
Figure 4-46: RGPS Lightning Arrestor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-70
Figure 4-47: RF–GPS Installation and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-72
Figure 4-48: Span and RF–GPS Cabling Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-73
Figure 5-1: DIP Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Figure 5-2: Expansion Frames DIP Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Figure 5-3: Location of Circuit Breaker for –48 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
Figure 5-4: Bottom View of cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
Figure 6-1: LAN Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Figure 6-2: WinLMF Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
Figure 6-3: WinLMF Connection Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
Figure 6-4: BTS Login Screen – Identifying Circuit and Packet BTS Files . . .
6-20
Figure 6-5: Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) State of a Packet
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
Figure 6-6: Available Packet Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Figure 6-7: Packet Mode Site with MCC–1 and BBX–1 under LMF
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
Figure 6-8: LMF Computer Common MMI Connections – Motorola MMI
Interface Kit, SLN2006A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-31
Figure 6-9: MMI Connection Detail – Fabricated MMI Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
Figure 6-10: BTS Ethernet LAN Termination Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33
Figure 6-11: CSA MMI Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46
Figure 6-12: IS–95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –
Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56
Figure 6-13: IS–95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –
Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
List of Figures – continued
MAY 2004
Figure 6-14: TX Calibration Test Setup –
CyberTest (IS–95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) . . .
6-58
Figure 6-15: TX Calibration Test Setup – Using Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-59
Figure 6-16: TX Calibration Test Setup –
Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) . . . . .
6-60
Figure 6-17: IS–95A/B ATP Test Set–up–
CyberTest, Advantest R3465, and Agilent 8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-61
Figure 6-18: IS–95A/B ATP Test Setup – HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-62
Figure 6-19: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup Agilent Test
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63
Figure 6-20: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup –
Agilent E4432B/8935 Series E6380A and E4432B/E4406A Test Equipment .
6-64
Figure 6-21: Cal Setup for TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling
Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-72
Figure 6-22: Cal Setup for Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal
Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-73
Figure 7-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-13
Figure 7-2: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-20
Figure 9-1: Compact BTS Front Panel Layout without Front Panel Cover . . . .
9-2
Figure 9-2: Compact BTS Fan and CCP2 Shelf Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3
Figure 9-3: Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5
Figure 9-4: HSO or MSO Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-9
Figure 9-5: HSO or MSO Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-10
Figure 9-6: RGPS Head and Mounting Pipe/Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-13
Figure 9-7: RF–GPS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-16
Figure 9-8: RF–GPS Placement on CBIO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-17
Figure 9-9: Power Supply Module (PSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-20
Figure 9-10: Clock Synchronization and Alarm Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-23
Figure 9-11: Group Line Interface 3 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-27
Figure 9-12: MCC 1X Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-31
Figure 9-13: BBX–1X Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-35
Figure 9-14: Compact Multi–Coupler Preselector Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-39
Figure 9-15: Compact Multi–Coupler Preselector Card Jumper Connection . .
9-40
Figure 9-16: MCC–DO Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-44
Figure 9-17: CBIO Board with SDCX Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-49
Figure 9-18: SDCX Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-52
Figure 9-19: CBIO Board with SDCX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-53
Figure 9-20: CBIO Board with SDCX Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-54
Figure 9-21: cMPC Cable Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-58
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
ix
List of Figures – continued
Figure 9-22: Filter Tray Connectors and Cable Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-61
Figure 9-23: Filter Tray Connectors and Cable Part Numbers (SGLN6223) . . .
9-62
Figure 9-24: Filter Tray Connectors and Cable Part Numbers (SGLN6222) . . .
9-66
Figure 9-25: Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-69
Figure 9-26: PDA Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-71
Figure 9-27: Power Distribution Assembly for –48VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-72
Figure 9-28: Power Distribution Assembly for +27VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-74
Figure 9-29:Heat Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-76
Figure 9-30: HMS Heater Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-79
Figure 9-31: HMS Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-80
Figure 9-32: Blower Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-82
Figure 11-1: TME and BTS Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-9
Figure 11-2: TX Output Fault Isolation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-35
Figure 11-3: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-51
Figure 11-4: GLI3 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-54
Figure 11-5: MCC24 and MCC–1X Front Panel LEDs and LED
Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-56
Figure 11-6: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-58
Figure B-1: Agilent E7495A Pre–Power Sensor Calibration Connection . . . . .
B-4
Figure B-2: Agilent E7495A Power Sensor Calibration Connection . . . . . . . . .
B-4
Figure B-3: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-5
Figure B-4: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-6
Figure B-5: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-8
Figure B-6: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-9
Figure B-7: Agilent 8935 Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-9
Figure B-8: HP 8921A and HP 83236A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-11
Figure B-9: R3465 Communications Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-12
Figure B-10: HP 437 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-14
Figure B-11: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-15
Figure B-12: RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-16
Figure B-13: HP 8921A/600 Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and
GPIB without Rubidium Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-18
Figure B-14: HP 8921A Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB
with Rubidium Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-20
Figure B-15: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-23
Figure B-16: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-24
Figure B-17: Agilent 8935/E4432B 10MHz Reference and Even Second
Tick Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-26
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
List of Figures – continued
MAY 2004
Figure B-18: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-26
Figure B-19: Advantest 10 MHz Reference and Serial I/O Connections . . . . . .
B-27
Figure B-20: Performing Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration) . . . . .
B-28
Figure B-21: Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-29
Figure B-22: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-31
Figure B-23: Cable Calibration Using HP8921 with PCS Interface . . . . . . . . .
B-35
Figure B-24: Cable Calibration Using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-38
Figure D-1: Fabricated MMI Cable Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
Figure E-1: Three Expansion BTSes Cabling Diagram with Two cCLPAs . . .
E-4
Figure E-2: Two Expansion BTSes Cabling Diagram with Two cCLPAs . . . . .
E-6
Figure E-3: One Expansion BTS Cabling Diagram with Two cCLPAs . . . . . . .
E-8
Figure E-4: Three Expansion BTSes Cabling Diagram with One cCLPA . . . . .
E-11
Figure E-5: Two Expansion BTSes Cabling Diagram with One cCLPA . . . . . .
E-13
Figure E-6: One Expansion BTS Cabling Diagram with One cCLPA . . . . . . . .
E-15
Figure E-7: Three Expansion BTSes Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-17
Figure E-8: Two Expansion BTSes Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-18
Figure E-9: One Expansion BTS Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-19
Figure E-10: Three Expansion BTSes Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-24
Figure E-11: Outdoor Two Expansion BTSes Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-25
Figure E-12: Outdoor One Expansion BTS Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-26
Figure F-1: Three Expansion BTSes LAN Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
Figure F-2: Two Expansion BTSes LAN Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-2
Figure F-3: One Expansion BTSes LAN Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-2
Figure H-1: Cabling Compact BTS Packet Operation Integrated BTS
Router Spans – One Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-5
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
xi
List of Tables
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
Software Release 2.16.4.X
xii
FCC Part 68 Registered Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxv
Table 1-1: Abbreviations and Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
Table 1-2: Regular Band Class 0 TX and RX Frequency vs Channel . . . . . . . .
1-9
Table 1-3: China A–Band TX and RX Frequency vs Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
Table 1-4: Recommended Tools and Materials for Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
Table 1-5: CCP2 Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers for Logical BTS . . .
1-21
Table 1-6: Shelf Device ID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-24
Table 2-1: Procedure to Prepare the Site for the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Table 2-2: Recommended Unpacking Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
Table 2-3: Unpacking Equipment from a Cardboard or Wood Container . . . . .
2-11
Table 2-4: Procedure to Remove Outdoor Equipment from Container . . . . . . .
2-11
Table 2-5: Procedure to Remove Indoor Equipment from Container . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Table 2-6: Installation Dimensions for the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Table 2-7: Minimum Clearances for the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Table 2-8: Installation Dimensions for the cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
Table 2-9: Minimum Clearances for the cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
Table 2-10: Installation Dimensions for the TME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
Table 2-11: Minimum Clearances for the TME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
Table 2-12: Installation Dimensions for the PDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-23
Table 2-13: Minimum Clearances for the PDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-23
Table 3-1: Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Table 3-2: Cables Needed for Antenna Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Table 3-3: Pin and Signal Information for Cable B (Antenna Cable) . . . . . . . .
3-6
Table 3-4: Cables Needed for Span/RGPS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
Table 3-5: Pin/Signal Information for Span Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Table 3-6: RGPS Pin/Signal Name Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Table 3-7: Cabling for Local GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
Table 3-8: Local GPS Antenna Mounting Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
Table 4-1: Procedure to Attach Mounting Plate to Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
List of Tables – continued
MAY 2004
Table 4-2: Procedure to Attach BTS Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
Table 4-3: Procedure to Attach BTS to Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Table 4-4: DC Input Cable Description and Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Table 4-5: Procedure to Mount the Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Table 4-6: Ground Cable and Lug Description and Part Number . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Table 4-7: Procedure to Ground the cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Table 4-8: Procedure to Attach DC Power Cable to the cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
Table 4-9: Data Cable Description and Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
Table 4-10: Data Cable Wiring Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
Table 4-11: Procedure to Attach BTS Data Cable to cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17
Table 4-12: Procedure to Pole or Wall Mount the cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19
Table 4-13: TME Conduit Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23
Table 4-14: Procedure to Pole Mount the TME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
Table 4-15: Procedure to Install Mounting Bracket on a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
Table 4-16: Procedure to Install Compact BTS in a TME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
Table 4-17: Procedure to Install the HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Table 4-18: Conduit Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-33
Table 4-19: Procedure to Install Mounting Bracket Assembly on a Pole . . . . .
4-37
Table 4-20: Procedure to Install the Wall Mounting Bracket on a Wall . . . . . . .
4-38
Table 4-21: Procedure to Install the Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-40
Table 4-22: PDE Punchblock Wiring Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-41
Table 4-23: Ground Cable and Lug Description and Part Number . . . . . . . . . .
4-46
Table 4-24: Procedure to Attach the Earth Ground Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-47
Table 4-25: Procedure to Ground an Outdoor Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-49
Table 4-26: DC Input Cable Description and Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-53
Table 4-27: Procedure to Connect DC Power to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-53
Table 4-28: Procedure to Connect DC Power to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-55
Table 4-29: AC Input Cable Description and Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-57
Table 4-30: Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-59
Table 4-31: Procedure to Install Antenna Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-59
Table 4-32: List of Required Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-63
Table 4-33: Pin/Signal Information for Span Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-65
Table 4-34: Procedure to Install 1X or DO Span Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-65
Table 4-35: Pinout for Cables C and C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-66
Table 4-36: Procedure for Installing the RGPS Head and Cabling . . . . . . . . . .
4-67
Table 4-37: Procedure for Installing RF–GPS Antenna and Cabling . . . . . . . . .
4-70
Table 4-38: Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-74
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
xiii
List of Tables
xiv
– continued
Table 4-39: Customer Input Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-74
Table 4-40: Customer Input Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-75
Table 4-41: Procedure for Using Ferrite Core on Customer Input and
Output Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-75
Table 4-42: Indoor Installation Completion Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-77
Table 5-1: Frame ID Switch Position – Single/Starter Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Table 5-2: Frame ID Switch Position – Expansion 1 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Table 5-3: Frame ID Switch Position – Expansion 2 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Table 5-4: Frame ID Switch Position – Expansion 3 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Table 5-5: BTS DC Pre–Power Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
Table 5-6: cCLPA DC Pre–Power Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
Table 5-7: PDE Initial Power –Up Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
Table 5-8: Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9
Table 5-9: Procedure to Verify Battery Backup DC Power Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9
Table 5-10: Procedure for BTS Initial Power–Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
Table 5-11: Procedure cCLPA Initial Power–Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
Table 5-12: TME DC Initial Power–Up Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Table 5-13: Procedure to Remove Power to BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
Table 5-14: Procedure to Remove Power to cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
Table 5-15: Procedure to Remove Power to PDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
Table 6-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Table 6-2: Install WinLMF using CD ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
Table 6-3: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the WinLMF Computer . . . . . . . . .
6-12
Table 6-4: Create HyperTerminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
Table 6-5: T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
Table 6-6: Connecting the WinLMF to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
Table 6-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Table 6-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
Table 6-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
Table 6-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
Table 6-11: Establishing MMI Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30
Table 6-12: Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34
Table 6-13: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38
Table 6-14: Download and Enable GLI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39
Table 6-15: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . .
6-40
Table 6-16: Select CSA Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41
Table 6-17: Enable CSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
List of Tables – continued
MAY 2004
Table 6-18: Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-42
Table 6-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & HSO/MSO Verification) . . . . . . . .
6-45
Table 6-20: GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47
Table 6-21: IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
Table 6-22: CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . .
6-54
Table 6-23: Procedure for Selecting Test Equipment Manually in the
Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-67
Table 6-24: Procedure for Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect . . . . .
6-68
Table 6-25: Procedure for Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-69
Table 6-26: Procedure to Test Cabling Calibration using Communication
System Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-70
Table 6-27: Procedure to Calibrate TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using
Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-71
Table 6-28: Procedure for Calibrating Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using
Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-72
Table 6-29: Procedure for Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-73
Table 6-30: Procedure for Setting TX and RX Directional Coupler Loss
Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-74
Table 6-31: Procedure to Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path Calibration . . . .
6-78
Table 6-32: Maximum and Minimum Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-79
Table 6-33: Test Patterns with Channels and Gain Settings Used . . . . . . . . . . .
6-81
Table 6-35: Procedure for All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-83
Table 6-36: Procedure to Download BLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-85
Table 6-37: Procedure for BTS TX Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-86
Table 6-38: Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-88
Table 7-1: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests . . . . . . . .
7-4
Table 7-2: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
Table 7-3: All TX ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
Table 7-4: All RX ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8
Table 7-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-11
Table 7-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14
Table 7-7: Test Pilot Time Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-16
Table 7-8: Test Code Domain Power/Noise Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-19
Table 7-9: Test FER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-21
Table 7-10: Generating an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-23
Table 8-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
Table 8-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Table 8-3: Remove External Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
Table 8-4: Bring Modules into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
xv
List of Tables
xvi
– continued
Table 8-5: Terminate the WinLMF Session and Remove the WinLMF . . . . . . .
8-4
Table 8-6: Connect T1 or E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
Table 8-7: Check Before Leaving the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5
Table 8-8: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5
Table 9-1: Procedure to Remove Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5
Table 9-2: Procedure to Install Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-6
Table 9-3: Procedure to Remove HSO or MSO Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-8
Table 9-4: Procedure to Install HSO or MSO Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-8
Table 9-5: Procedure to Remove RGPS Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-12
Table 9-6: Procedure to Install RGPS Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-12
Table 9-7: Procedure to Remove RF–GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-15
Table 9-8: Procedure to Install RF–GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-15
Table 9-9: Procedure to Remove Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-19
Table 9-10: Procedure to Install Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-19
Table 9-11: Procedure to Remove CSA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-21
Table 9-12: Procedure to Install CSA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-22
Table 9-13: Procedure to Remove GLI3 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-25
Table 9-14: Procedure to Install GLI3 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-25
Table 9-15: Procedure to Recover GLI3 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-26
Table 9-16: Procedure to Remove MCC–1X Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-29
Table 9-17: Procedure to Install MCC–1X Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-30
Table 9-18: Procedure to Remove BBX–1X Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-34
Table 9-19: Procedure to Install BBX–1X Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-34
Table 9-20: cMPC PWR/ALM LED State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-36
Table 9-21: Procedure to Remove cMPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-37
Table 9-22: Procedure to Install cMPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-38
Table 9-23: MCC–DO LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-41
Table 9-24: Procedure to Remove MCC–DO Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-42
Table 9-25: Procedure to Install MCC–DO Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-43
Table 9-26: Procedure to Remove CBIO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-46
Table 9-27: Procedure to Install CBIO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-47
Table 9-28: Procedure to Remove SDCX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-50
Table 9-29: Procedure to Install SDCX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-51
Table 9-30: Preparation Procedure for Removing the Filter Tray . . . . . . . . . . .
9-56
Table 9-31: Procedure to Remove Filter Tray Kit SGLF4152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-57
Table 9-32: Procedure to Remove cMPC Cable Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-57
Table 9-33: Procedure to Install cMPC Cable Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-58
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
List of Tables – continued
MAY 2004
Table 9-34: Procedure to Install Filter Tray Kit SGLF4152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-58
Table 9-35: Procedure to Remove Filter Tray Kit SGLN6223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-61
Table 9-36: Procedure to Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-63
Table 9-37: Procedure to Remove Filter Tray Kit SGLN6222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-65
Table 9-38: Procedure to Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-65
Table 9-39: Procedure to Remove cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-67
Table 9-40: Procedure to Install cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-68
Table 9-41: Procedure to Remove PDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-71
Table 9-42: Procedure to Install PDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-73
Table 9-43: Procedure to Remove HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-77
Table 9-44: Procedure to Re–install HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-77
Table 9-45: Procedure to Replace Heater Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-78
Table 9-46: Procedure to Install Heater Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-78
Table 9-47: Procedure to Replace HMS Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-79
Table 9-48: Procedure to Install HMS Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-80
Table 9-49: Procedure to Replace Blower Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-81
Table 9-50: Procedure to Install Blower Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-81
Table 9-51: Procedure to Remove TME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-83
Table 9-52: Procedure to Install TME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-84
Table 9-53: Fan Module Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-87
Table 9-54: HSO or MSO Module Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-87
Table 9-55: RGPS Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-87
Table 9-56: RF GPS Module Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-87
Table 9-57: PSM Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-88
Table 9-58: CSA Card Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-88
Table 9-59: GLI3 Card Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-88
Table 9-60: MCC–1X Card Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-88
Table 9-61: BBX–1X Card Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-89
Table 9-62: Compact MPC Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-89
Table 9-63: MCC–DO Card Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-89
Table 9-64: CBIO Board Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-89
Table 9-65: SDCX Module Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-89
Table 9-66: Filter Tray Kit Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-90
Table 9-67: cCLPA Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-90
Table 9-68: TME PDA Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-90
Table 9-69: TME HMS Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-90
Table 9-70: TME HMS Heater Element Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-91
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
xvii
List of Tables
xviii
– continued
Table 9-71: TME HMS Controller Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-91
Table 9-72: TME HMS Blower Fan Item Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-91
Table 10-1: Login and Access Alarm Window Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2
Table 10-2: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a
Circuit BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3
Table 10-3: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a
Circuit BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-9
Table 10-4: Shut Down Carrier Signaling Functions Procedure For a
Circuit BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-16
Table 10-5: Restore Site Signaling Operations Procedure For a
Circuit BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-23
Table 10-6: Restore Sector Signaling Operations Procedure For a
Circuit BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-26
Table 10-7: Restore Carrier Signaling Operations Procedure For a
Circuit BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-29
Table 10-8: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a
Packet BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-33
Table 10-9: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a
Packet BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-40
Table 10-10: Shut Down Carrier Signaling Functions Procedure For a
Packet BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-47
Table 10-11: Restore Site Signaling Operations Procedure For a
Packet BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-53
Table 10-12: Restore Sector Signaling Operations Procedure For a
Packet BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-56
Table 10-13: Restore Carrier Signaling Operations Procedure For a
Packet BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-59
Table 11-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
Table 11-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN . . . . . . . .
11-2
Table 11-3: GLI IP Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3
Table 11-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure . . . . . . . .
11-5
Table 11-5: Troubleshooting a Communications System Analyzer
Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5
Table 11-6: Troubleshooting a Signal Generator Communication Failure . . . . .
11-6
Table 11-7: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6
Table 11-8: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7
Table 11-9: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7
Table 11-10: cCLPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-8
Table 11-11: Restore Site Signaling Operations Procedure For a
Packet BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-10
Table 11-12: Restore Sector Signaling Operations Procedure For a
Packet BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-13
Table 11-13: Restore Carrier Signaling Operations Procedure For a
Packet BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-16
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
List of Tables – continued
MAY 2004
Table 11-14: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-21
Table 11-15: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN . . . . . . .
11-22
Table 11-16: GLI IP Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-23
Table 11-17: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure . . . . . . .
11-25
Table 11-18: Troubleshooting a Communications System Analyzer
Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-25
Table 11-19: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-26
Table 11-20: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-27
Table 11-21: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-27
Table 11-22: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-28
Table 11-23: LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-28
Table 11-24: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-30
Table 11-25: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-31
Table 11-26: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed
Reduced ATP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-36
Table 11-27: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-36
Table 11-28: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-36
Table 11-29: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor
Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-38
Table 11-30: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-39
Table 11-31: CSM Reference (Clock) Sources by GPS Type and
Kit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-41
Table 11-32: No GLI Control Through LMF (All GLIs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-44
Table 11-33: No GLI Control Through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs) . . .
11-44
Table 11-34: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over Co–located GLI . . . . . .
11-44
Table 11-35: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over AMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-44
Table 11-36: MGLI Control Good – No Control over Co–located BBXs . . . . .
11-45
Table 11-37: BBX Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic . . . . . . .
11-45
Table 11-38: No MCC–1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements . . . . . . . . . .
11-45
Table 11-39: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-46
Table 11-40: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-47
Table 11-41: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-47
Table 11-42: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-48
Table 11-43: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail on Single Antenna Path . .
11-49
Table 11-44: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-57
Table 11-45: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-59
Table A-1: Procedure to Test MCC–DO Code Domain Power . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Table A-2:Procedure to Test the MCC–DO TX Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
xix
List of Tables
xx
– continued
Table A-3: Procedure to Test MCC–DO Pilot Time Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
Table A-4: Procedure to Test MCC–DO Rho . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
Table A-5: Procedure to Test MCC–DO Packet Error Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-10
Table B-1: Set IP Address on Agilent E7495A test set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
Table B-2: Detecting Agilent E7495A Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
Table B-3: E7495A Power Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
Table B-4: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-5
Table B-5: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-7
Table B-6: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-8
Table B-7: Verify and/or Change Agilent 8935 (formerly HP 8935)
GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-10
Table B-8: Verify and/or Change HP 8921A and HP 83236A
GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-11
Table B-9: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . .
B-12
Table B-10: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address . . . . . .
B-13
Table B-11: Verify and/or Change HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . .
B-14
Table B-12: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter
GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-15
Table B-13: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel
Connections Without Rubidium Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-17
Table B-14: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel
Connections With Rubidium Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-19
Table B-15: System Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-21
Table B-16: Pretest Setup for HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-22
Table B-17: Pretest Setup for Agilent 8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-22
Table B-18: Advantest R3465 Clock Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-24
Table B-19: Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-25
Table B-20: Perform Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration) . . . . . . . . .
B-28
Table B-21: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-29
Table B-22: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-31
Table B-23: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) . . . . .
B-32
Table B-24: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest
R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-36
Table C-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-2
Table D-1: Parts Required to Fabricate MMI Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
Table D-2: Fabricated MMI Cable Wire Run List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
Table E-1: Combiner and Directional Coupler Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
Table E-2: Procedure for Installing Expansion Compact BTS with Dual
cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-2
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
List of Tables – continued
MAY 2004
Table E-3: Starter and Three Expansion BTS Interconnect Cabling
for Circuit or Packet Configuration with Dual cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-3
Table E-4: Starter and Two Expansion BTS Interconnect Cabling
for Circuit or Packet Configuration with Dual cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-5
Table E-5: Starter and One Expansion BTS Interconnect Cabling
for Circuit or Packet Configuration with Dual cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-7
Table E-6: Procedure for Installing Expansion Compact BTS with Single
cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-9
Table E-7: Starter and Three Expansion BTS Interconnect Cabling
for Circuit or Packet Configuration with Single cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-10
Table E-8: Starter and Two Expansion BTS Interconnect Cabling
for Circuit or Packet Configuration with Single cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-12
Table E-9: Starter and One Expansion BTS Interconnect Cabling
for Circuit or Packet Configuration with Single cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-14
Table E-10: Procedure for Installing Expansion Compact BTS without
cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-16
Table E-11: BBX (Carrier) to cCLPA Via RS485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-20
Table E-12: Starter and Three Expansion BTS Cabling for
Circuit or Packet to Dual cCLPAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-20
Table E-13: Starter and Two Expansion BTS Cabling for
Circuit or Packet to Dual cCLPAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-21
Table E-14: Starter and One Expansion BTS Cabling for
Circuit or Packet to Dual cCLPAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-21
Table E-15: Combiner and Directional Coupler Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-22
Table E-16: Procedure for Installing Expansion Compact BTSes . . . . . . . . . . .
E-23
Table F-1: Procedure for Installing LAN Cabling for Logical BTS . . . . . . . . . .
F-3
Table G-1: Suggested Preliminary Verification Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
Table G-2: Verify GLI3 Software Version and Span Parameter Settings . . . . . .
G-3
Table G-3: Set GLI3 Span Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-6
Table H-1: Implement IBR Functionality in New BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-2
Table H-2: BTS Span Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-4
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
xxi
Foreword
Scope of manual
This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system
craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system
equipment and ancillary devices.
This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment
training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or
enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
Obtaining manuals
To view, download, or order manuals (original or revised), visit the
Motorola Lifecycles Customer web page at
https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com/, or contact your Motorola
account representative.
If Motorola changes the content of a manual after the original printing
date, Motorola publishes a new version with the same part number but a
different revision character.
Text conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out
information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the
surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.
The four categories of these special paragraphs are:
NOTE
Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that
you can use.
IMPORTANT
Presents information to help you avoid an undesirable
situation or provides additional information to help you
understand a topic or concept.
CAUTION
Presents information to identify a situation in which
damage to software, stored data, or equipment could occur,
thus avoiding the damage.
WARNING
Presents information to warn you of a potentially
hazardous situation in which there is a possibility of
personal injury.
xxii
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Foreword – continued
The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation of
software information:
S In text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type style
without angular strokes: for example, SERIF versus SANS SERIF)
are used to name a command.
S In text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and the
system output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.
S In command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent
those parts of the command string that must be entered exactly as
shown and typewriter style characters represent command output
responses as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.
S In the command format of the command definition, typewriter
style characters represent the command parameters.
Reporting manual errors
To report a documentation error, call the CNRC (Customer Network
Resolution Center) and provide the following information to enable
CNRC to open an SR (Service Request):
– the document type
– the manual title, part number, and revision character
– the page number(s) with the error
– a detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solution
Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our manuals.
Contact us
Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to the email
address below:
cdma.documentation@motorola.com
Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our information.
Manual banner definitions
A banner (oversized text on the bottom of the page, for example,
PRELIMINARY) indicates that some information contained in the
manual is not yet approved for general customer use.
24-hour support service
If you have problems regarding the operation of your equipment, please
contact the Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC) for immediate
assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:
North America
Europe, Middle East, Africa
Asia Pacific
Japan & Korea . . . . . . . . . . .
+1–800–433–5202
+44– (0) 1793–565444
+86–10–88417733
+81–3–5463–3550
For further CNRC contact information, contact your Motorola account
representative.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
xxiii
FCC Requirements
Content
This section presents the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for the
SC480 domestic series Radio Frequency Base TransceiverStations.
FCC Part 15 Requirements
Part 15.19a(3) – Information to User
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operationis subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
includinginterference that may cause undesired
operation.
Part 15.21 – Information to User
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Motorolacould void your authority to operate the
equipment.
xxiv
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
FCC Requriements – continued
Part 15.105(b) – Information to User
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
thelimits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of theFCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonableprotection against harmful interference in a
residentialinstallation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordancewith the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radiocommunications. However, there is no
guarantee thatinterference will not occur in a particular
installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or televisionreception, which can be
determined by turning the equipmentOFF and ON, the user
is encouraged to try to correct theinterference by one or
more of the following measures:
S Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
S Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
S Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
S Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
Part 68 Requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal
CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules. A label on the GLI3 board,
easily visiblewith the board removed, contains the FCC Registration
Number for thisequipment. If requested, this information must be
provided to the telephone company.
FCC Part 68 Registered Devices
Device
SC480–800MHz 1X/EVDO See Note
FCC Part 68 ID
US: IHEDENANSC4801XDO
NOTE
The SC480–800MHz 1X/EVDO BTS is registered with an FCC part number
(US: IHEDENANSC4801XDO) which will cover all the internal cards and
modules.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your T1. If
this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice so that
you can modify your equipment as required to maintain uninterrupted
service.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
xxv
FCC Requirements – continued
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of
service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone
company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised
of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is
necessary.
If you experience trouble operating this equipment with the T1, please
contact:
Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)
1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436N
Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004
Phone Number: (847) 632–5390
for repair and/or warranty information. You should not attempt to repair
this equipment yourself. This equipment contains no customer or
user–serviceable parts.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could
void your authority to operate this equipment.
FCC Label and Location
LABEL SHOWN ISFOR
DISPLAY PURPOSES
ONLY.
LABEL PLACED HERE
ModelNo.Motorola
Model No. ___________
MOTOROLA
xxvi
SERIAL NO.
FCCIDIHET5EJ1
FCC ID: IHET5EJ1
Complies with Part 68, FCC Rules
FCC Reg. No.
US: IHEDENANSC4801XDO
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
General Safety
Remember! . . . Safety
depends on you!!
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all
phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in
this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific
warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,
manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes
no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers
of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow
these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe
operation of the equipment in your operating environment.
Ground the instrument
To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be
connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a
three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged
into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a
three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact
adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an
electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and
mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) safety standards.
NOTE
Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio
Installations – 68P81150E62.
Do not operate in an explosive
atmosphere
Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or
fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment
constitutes a definite safety hazard.
Keep away from live circuits
Operating personnel must:
S not remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service
Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove
equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component
replacement, or any internal adjustment.
S not replace components with power cable connected. Under certain
conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable
removed.
S always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
xxvii
General Safety – continued
Do not service or adjust alone
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,
capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
Do not substitute parts or
modify equipment
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install
substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.
Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure
that safety features are maintained.
Dangerous procedure
warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous
procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the
warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety
precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment
in your operating environment.
WARNING
Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this
equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and
adjusting .
xxviii
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Revision History
Manual Number
68P09260A11–7
Manual Title
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
Software Release 2.16.4.X
Version Information
The following table lists the manual version, date of version, and
remarks on the version.
Version
Level
Date of Issue
–1
Feb 4, 2004
DRAFT – For General engineering review
–2
Feb 23, 2004
PRELIMINARY – Incorporated Engineering review comments.
–3
Mar 16, 2004
First Order Application – Incorporated comments from engineering and
test groups.
–4
Apr 10, 2004
FOA updated. Corrected text and illustrations due to SRs
–5
Apr 29, 2004
FOA updated, corrected grounding information and other minor text
errors, added in AC/DC power cabling information for outdoor
enclosures.
–6
May 7, 2004
FOA for indoor circuit configuration
–7
May 27, 2004
Preliminary for Packet configuration
MAY 2004
Remarks
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
xxix
Revision History – continued
Notes
xxx
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
Table of Contents
MAY 2004
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope of this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
Required Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations and acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
1-5
1-5
800 MHz CDMA Frequencies and Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
800 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
China 800 MHz Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
1-8
1-9
Installation Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools and Materials for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
1-11
1-11
ATP Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test cable calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
1-14
1-14
1-14
1-14
1-15
1-19
BTS Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shelf Device ID Numbers for Stand–Alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HSO and MSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
1-20
1-24
1-26
1-26
1-26
Outdoor Enclosure Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor Enclosure Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Management Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Distribution Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combined Compact Linear Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
1-30
1-30
1-31
1-32
Installation and ATP Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-33
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1
Table of Contents
– continued
Indoor Installation Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor Installation Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-33
1-33
1-33
MAY 2004
Introduction
Scope of this Document
This document provides information pertaining to the hardware
installation, cabling installation, ATP and Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
procedures of the Motorola SCt480 CDMA Base Transceiver
Subsystem (BTS), 800 MHz, –48 and +27 VDC versions. Information
on Circuit and Packet Backhaul, Expansion, and Logical BTS are also
included
The FRU procedures cover all components that are considered
replaceable.
An individual SCt480 BTS will be referred to as the “BTS” for the
remainder of this document.
For detailed installation information of non-Motorola equipment, refer to
the vendor manuals provided with such equipment.
Manual Order
The installation order is the order of the manual starting at Chapter 1 and
continuing through Chapter 5. After hardware installation has been
completed, run the ATP for the system by following the procedures
defined in Chapter 6 of this manual.
Chapter 1
“Introduction” — This is a brief outline of the manual. Also provided is
a list of additional documents and tools necessary to complete the
procedures.
Chapter 2
“Site Preparation” — This chapter contains the necessary information to
verify the condition of the site.
Chapter 3
“BTS Cables” — This chapter contains the general information on the
cables required for the Compact BTS.
Chapter 4
“Installation of Equipment, Cables, and GPS” — This chapter contains
procedures for installing the equipment, external AC, DC, data, ground
antenna, and GPS cabling.
Chapter 5
“Pre–Power–Up, Initial Power, and Removal of Power” — This chapter
contains procedures for performing electrical power checks.
Chapter 6
“Optimization and Calibration Procedures” – This chapter contains
general information and procedures for optimizing the BTS.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-1
1
Introduction – continued
Chapter 7
“Acceptance Test Procedures” – This chapter contains general
information and procedures for testing the BTS.
Chapter 8
“Leaving the Site” – This chapter contains general information and
procedures for preparing to leave and departing the site.
Chapter 9
“Field Replaceable Units” – This chapter contains general information
and procedures for removing and installing boards, cards and modules of
the BTS.
Chapter 10
“Reference Procedures Performed at OMC–R ” – This chapter contains
general information and procedures to be followed by the OMC–R
operator.
Appendix A
“MCC–Data Only ” – This appendix contains general information and
test procedures for the DO card.
Appendix B
“Test Equipment Preparation ” – This appendix contains general
information and procedures for setting up the test equipment.
Appendix C
“Download ROM Code ” – This appendix contains general information
and procedures for the loading ROM code into the BTS cards.
Appendix D
“MMI Cable ” – This appendix contains general information and
procedures for making an MMI cable.
Appendix E
“Expansion BTS Configuration” – This appendix contains general
information and interconnect diagrams for expansion configuration.
Appendix F
“Logical BTS LAN Configuration for Compact BTS (Indoor) ” – This
appendix contains general information and interconnect diagrams for
logical BTS.
Appendix G
“Integrated BTS Router Preliminary Operations” – This appendix
contains general information and procedures IBR and span line
verification.
1-2
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Introduction – continued
Appendix H
“Integrated BTS Router Installation ” – This appendix contains general
information and procedures IBR and span line installation.
Appendix I
“Packet Backhaul BTS ” – This appendix contains general information
and procedures for packet backhaul operation with LMF Help.
Site Cleanliness
While performing the procedures provided in this document, ensure
that:
S for an internal installation, the site is kept clean and free of tracked-in
dirt
S all packing material has been removed from the equipment.
S all tools not currently in use are picked-up as the installation
progresses.
S all trash is removed from the site at the end of each day and after the
installation is complete.
S equipment is covered with a tarpaulin whenever possible.
S use a shop-vac whenever you perform an internal installation
procedure that generates dust, such as drilling or cutting.
Site Manager
The site manager is the person in charge of and responsible for the full
site. The installer will be verifying a variety of conditions with the site
manager.
System Diagrams
Figure 1-1 shows the BTS mounted on a rack. The configuration is for
indoor operation.
Configurations
The BTS supports the omni configuration.
The power configuration for the BTS is:
S DC power only
The synchronization configurations for the BTS are:
S Remote GPS Receiver – synchronous operation
S RF GPS
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-3
1
Introduction – continued
Figure 1-1: Mounted BTS and Rack
NOTE:
SIngle BTS setup shown.
Compact PA and RGPS Head
are not shown
Rack
BTS
Location for
Second BTS
Mounting
Bracket
Mounting Plate
ti–cdma–wp–00303–v01–ildoc–ah
1-4
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Required Documents
Installation
The following documents are required to perform the installation, ATP
and FRU procedures of the cell site equipment:
S SCt480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP and FRU –
68P09260A11 (This manual)
S Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites
– Hard copy (Motorola Part Number 6881089E50–A)
– CD–ROM (Motorola Part Number 9882904Y01)
S Grounding Guidelines for Cellular Radio Installations
(Motorola part number 68P81150E62) or
– Appendix C of Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites
S Site Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), which
includes:
– site specific documentation
– channel allocation
– contact list (customer)
– ancillary/expendable equipment list
– site wiring lists
– contact list (Motorola support)
– job box inventory
S Demarcation Document (Scope of Work agreement)
S Installation manuals for non-Motorola equipment (for reference
purposes).
Abbreviations and acronyms
Table 1–1 contains a list of the abbreviations and acronyms used in this
manual.
Table 1-1: Abbreviations and Acronyms
Acronym
Description
ACT
Active
ALM
Alarm
ATP
Acceptance Test Procedure
AUX
Auxiliary
BLO
Bay Level Offset
BSS
Base Station System
BTS
Base Transceiver Station or Subsystem
BBX
Broad Band Transceiver
table continued on next page
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-5
1
Required Documents
– continued
Table 1-1: Abbreviations and Acronyms
Acronym
Description
CAL
Calibration
CBIO
Compact BTS Input/Output
CBSC
Centralized Base Station Controller
cCLPA
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier
CCP2
CDMA Channel Processor 2
CDF
Configuration Data File
CDMA
Code Division Multiple Access
cMPC
Compact Multi–coupler Preselector Card
CRMS
Cellular Remote Monitoring System
CSA
Clock Synchronization Alarms
DLM
Download Manager
EMPC
Expansion Compact Mulit–Preselector Card
ERP
Effective Rated Power
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
EXP
Expansion
FREQ
Frequency
FRU
Field Replaceable Unit
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
GLI 3
Group Line Interface III
GPS
Global Positioning System or Satellite
HMS
Heat Management System
HSO
High Stability Oscillator
HX
Heat Exchanger
INS
In–Service
INS_ACT
In–Service Active
INS_SBY
In–Service Standby
LAN
Local Area Network
LIF
Load Information File
LMF
Local Maintenance Facility
table continued on next page
1-6
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Required Documents – continued
Table 1-1: Abbreviations and Acronyms
Acronym
MAY 2004
Description
LMT
Local Maintenance Tool
MCC
Multi–Channel CDMA
MCC–DO
Multi–Channel CDMA Data Only
MMI
Man–Machine Interface
MON
Monitor
MSO
Medium Stability Oscillator
NECB
Network Element Configuration Base
NECF
Network Element Configuration File
NECJ
Network Element Change Journal
OMC–R
Operations and Maintenance Center – Radio
OOS
Out–of–Service
PDE
Power Distribution Enclosure
PSM
Power Supply Module
PWR
Power
RAM
Random Access Memory
ROM
Read Only Memory
RF GPS
Radio Frequency Global Positioning System
RGPS
Remote Global Positioning System
RX
Receive
SDCX
Synchronization Daisy–Chaining and
eXpansion
STA
Status
SYNC
Synchronization
TME
Thermal Management Enclosure
TX
Transmit
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-7
1
800 MHz CDMA Frequencies and Channels
800 MHz Center Frequencies
Table 1-2 lists the selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels and the corresponding transmit and receive frequencies for
Regular Band Class 0 (North America). Figure 1-2 shows the CDMA
Frequency Spectrum for Table 1-2. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
For Channels 1 – 799
S For TX
TX = 870 + (0.03 * Channel #)
Example: Channel 262
TX = 870 +0.03 * 262
TX = 877.86 MHz
S For RX
RX = 825 + (0.03 * Channel#)
Example: Channel 262
RX = 825 + (0.03 * 262)
RX = 832.860 MHz
For Channels 991 – 1023
S For TX
TX = 870 + [0.03 *(Channel# – 1023)]
Example: Channel 1015
TX = 870 + [0.03 * (1015 – 1023)]
TX = 870.240 MHz
S For RX
RX = 825 + [0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)]
Example: Channel 262
RX = 825 + [0.03 * (262–1023)]
RX = 847.830 MHz
NOTE
Conditionally Valid – Valid channels in TIA/EIA–97–D
that are <885 kHz from the operator’s band edge. If the
operator’s system must coexist with another system that
uses an adjacent frequency band, it is recommended that
the operator coordinate with the other operator to
determine if the usage of the Reduced–Sideband Spectral
Mask is required for Conditionally Valid channels. The
Reduced–Sideband Spectral Mask is in addition to other
spectral masks that apply.
1-8
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
800 MHz CDMA Frequencies and Channels – continued
CAUTION
Certain widely–spaced combinations of A–Band transmit
frequencies, when combined to drive one antenna, can
produce 3rd order intermodulation products that are within
the receive band. During system planning, the proper
selection of combined frequencies or the use of multiple
transmit antennas will prevent this situation. Additional
receive filtering at a particular cell site can also help. China
A Band is used in the China SC480–800 BTS in
conjunction with a GSM Elimination Filter.
Table 1-2: Regular Band Class 0 TX and RX Frequency vs Channel
System
Designator
CDMA Channel
Validity
CDMA Channel
Number
Transmit Center
Frequency (MHz)
Receive Center
Frequency (MHz)
Conditional Valid
1013 – 1019
824.700 – 824.880
869.700 – 869.880
Valid
1020 – 1023
824.910 – 825.000
869.910 – 870.000
Valid
1 – 303
825.030 – 834.090
870.030 – 879.090
Conditional Valid
304 – 311
834.120 – 834.330
879.120 – 879.330
Conditional Valid
356 – 362
836.680 – 835.860
880.680 – 880.860
Valid
363 – 637
835.890 – 844.110
880.890 – 889.110
Conditional Valid
638 – 644
844.140 – 844.320
889.140 – 889.320
A (1.5 MHz)
Conditional Valid
689 – 694
845.670 – 845.820
890.670 – 890.820
B (2.5 MHz)
Conditional Valid
739 – 746
847.170 – 847.380
892.170 – 892.380
Valid
747 – 770
847.410 – 848.100
892.410 – 893.100
Conditional Valid
771 – 777
848.130 – 848.310
893.130 – 893.310
A (1 MHz)
A (10 MHz)
B (10 MHz)
China 800 MHz Frequencies
The receive and transmit frequency ranges (A–Band) for China are as
follows:
S RX – 825.5000 MHz – 834.1000 MHz
S TX – 870.5000 MHz – 879.1000 MHz
Table 1-3 lists the China A–Band frequencies and channels.
Table 1-3: China A–Band TX and RX Frequency vs Channel
System
Designator
China
A–Band
MAY 2004
CDMA Channel
Validity
Valid
CDMA Channel
Number
Transmit Center
Frequency (MHz)
Receive Center
Frequency (MHz)
37 – 283
826.110 – 833.490
871.110 – 878.490
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-9
800 MHz CDMA Frequencies and Channels
– continued
Figure 1-2: CDMA Frequency Spectrum
TX
FREQUENCY INCREASE
1-10
(MHz)
RX
CHANNELS
824.700
824.880
824.910
825.000
825.030
869.700
869.880
869.910
870.000
870.030
1013
1019
1020
1023
825.110
870.110
37
CHINA A–BAND
833.490
878.490
283
834.090
834.120
303
304
834.330
879.090
879.120
897.330
835.680
880.680
356
835.860
835.890
880.860
880.890
362
363
844.110
844.140
889.110
889.140
637
638
844.320
889.320
644
845.670
890.670
689
845.820
890.820
694
847.170
892.170
739
847.380
847.410
892.380
892.410
746
747
848.100
848.130
893.100
893.130
770
771
848.330
893.330
777
311
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Installation Tools and Materials
Introduction
Many of the tools and materials depend on the style of the wall, pole, or
rack on which the mounting bracket is being installed. The tools and
materials required to install the BTS hardware are specified for each
mounting style. Due to the variability of mounting styles, additional
tools and materials may be required to meet specific site needs.
Tools and Materials for
Installation
The tools and materials listed in Table 1-4 are recommended to properly
and safely perform the installation procedures.
Table 1-4: Recommended Tools and Materials for Rack Mounting
Hand Tools
Materials
Purpose
Adjustable Torque ratchet and socket
set
Customer Supplied
General torquing of screws and nuts.
T10, T20, T30, Security T20,
Security T30 Torx, cross–recess,
flathead bits, 1/4–in. hex
Customer Supplied
General purpose use
Torque driver wrench, 1/4–in. hex
female drive, 0–10 N–M
(Utica P/N TCI–150 R/A
3/8–in. or equivalent)
Customer Supplied
General torquing of screws and nuts.
Power Drill, 1/4–in or 3/8–in drive
Appropriate wood and
masonry drill bits (Standard
set may be adequate)
Customer Supplied
Drill holes in wood and light concrete
Appropriate masonry drill
bits (Customer Supplied)
Rack installation to floor and RGPS
to wall
Adjustable Wrench
Customer Supplied
General purpose use
Mechanical lifting device
Customer Supplied
For lifting equipment
Bucklestrap Cutting Tool
(Motorola P/N
6604809N01)
Pole Mounting
Tape Measure
Customer Supplied
General purpose measurement
Heavy Gloves
Customer Supplied
Hand Safety
Safety Glasses
Customer Supplied
Eye Safety
Tin Snips
Customer Supplied
General purpose metal cutting
Hacksaw
Various blades
(Customer Supplied)
Cutting large coax cable
Metal File
Fine cut
(Customer Supplied)
Coax cable preparation
Flashlight
Customer Supplied
General purpose use
Utility Knife
Customer Supplied
General purpose cutting
Small Flathead Screwdriver
Customer Supplied
General purpose use
Hammer Drill
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-11
1
Installation Tools and Materials
– continued
Table 1-4: Recommended Tools and Materials for Rack Mounting
Hand Tools
Small Phillips Screwdriver
Materials
Purpose
Customer Supplied
General purpose use
Hex Crimping Tool
Various die sets
(Customer Supplied)
Create RF cabling and power/ground
cabling
RJ45 Crimping Tool
(Tyco P/N 2–231652–1,
853400–0, 853400–1,
853400–7 or equivalent)
Customer Supplied
Create RJ11/RJ45 cabling
5/16 Breakaway Torque Wrench,
9–in. lb
Customer Supplied
SMA Connectors
13/16 Breakaway Torque Wrench
38–in. lb
Customer Supplied
N Connectors
Volt/Ohmmeter or Digital Multimeter
Customer Supplied
Voltage and continuity testing
Label Maker
Customer Supplied
General purpose marking
Motorola P/N:
5587763T01
For installing the cCLPA
Customer Supplied
Accommodates 6 AWG to 26 AWG
RTV Sealant
(Customer Supplied)
Weatherproofing openings for cable
pass through
electrical tape
(Customer Supplied)
General purpose use
Fine Grit Sandpaper
(Customer Supplied)
Finishing coax cable surfaces
Cable Tie–wraps various
sizes.
(Customer Supplied)
General purpose dressing of cables
15–pin D–sub plug and
termination equipment
(Customer Supplied)
For RGPS cabling
BNC male style connectors
(Customer Supplied)
Coaxial span cable, interframe
cabling
N–male and N–female style
connectors for 1/2–in Heliax
(Customer Supplied)
Cabling between BTS, PA, and
Antenna
7/16 DIN connector for
1/2–in and 7/8–in Heliax
(Customer Supplied)
Antenna cabling
RF Cabling, 1/2–in and
7/8–in Heliax
Cabling between BTS, PA, and
Antenna
Braided Coax
(Customer Supplied)
Coaxial span cable, interframe
cabling
10AWG two–wire stranded
(Customer Supplied)
Power cabling
cCLPA Installation Handles
Wire Strippers
1-12
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Installation Tools and Materials – continued
Table 1-4: Recommended Tools and Materials for Rack Mounting
Hand Tools
Materials
Purpose
6 AWG stranded
(Customer Supplied)
Ground cabling
Assorted ground lugs
(6AWG, 10 AWG) ring style
(Customer Supplied)
Site ground cabling, Core power
input
Assortment of flat washers,
lock washers
(Customer Supplied)
Mounting equipment to racks and for
general purpose
Assortment of nuts M3 – M6
(Customer Supplied)
Mounting equipment to racks and for
general purpose
Rack screws (depends on
rack style used)
(Customer Supplied)
Rack mounting
T1/E1 span cabling (4 or 8
wire TP style)
(Customer Supplied)
Span and cCLPA signal cabling
ILSCO p/n CRB–6L2–14–58
two–hole ground lugs or
equiv. Hole spacing 5/8”,
hole sizes for 1/4” bolt, tang
width 13/32”.
(Customer Supplied)
Ground Lugs
Chalk or marker to mark
location on rack
(Customer Supplied)
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-13
1
ATP Tools and Materials
Policy
To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable test results, test equipment
meeting the following technical criteria should be used to perform the
ATP on the BTS equipment.
NOTE
During manual testing, you can substitute supported test
equipment with other test equipment models not supported
by the LMF. However, they must meet the same technical
specifications.
It is the responsibility of the customer to account for any measurement
variances and /or additional losses / inaccuracies that can be introduced
as a result of these substitutions. Before beginning the ATP, make sure
that the test equipment needed is on hand and operating properly.
Test equipment calibration
Optimal system performance and capacity depend on regular test
equipment service, calibration, and characterization. Follow the original
equipment manufacture (OEM) recommended maintenance and
calibration schedules closely.
Test cable calibration
Equipment test cables are very important in the ATP. It is recommended
that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the test cables
attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion loss within
the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cable insertion loss
needs to be made during the performance of tests.
Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the Local
Maintenance Facility (LMF) during the optimization procedure. This
method requires accurate test cable characterization in a lab
environment. The cable should be tagged with the characterization
information prior to field optimization.
Equipment Warm–up
After arriving at the a site, the test equipment should be plugged in and
turned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long as
possible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed–up for
a minimum of 60 minutes prior to the ATP.
S Communications Test Set
S Power Meter
1-14
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
ATP Tools and Materials – continued
Test Equipment List
The following pieces of test equipment are required during the ATP.
Common assorted tools like screwdrivers and keys are not listed, but are
still required. Read the owners manual on all of the following major
pieces of test equipment to understand their individual operation prior to
use in optimization.
NOTE
Always refer to specific OEM test equipment
documentation for detailed operating instructions.
CDMA LMF Hardware Requirements
A CDMA LMF computer platform that meets the following
requirements (or better) is recommended:
Notebook computer
128 MB RAM minimum (98SE) or 256 (Windows 2000)
PCMCIA to Serial I/O Adapter
266 MHz (32 bit CPU) Pentium processor
4 GigaByte internal hard disk drive
SVGA 12.1 inch active matrix color display with 1024 x 768
(recommended) or 800 x 600 pixel resolution and capability to display
more than 256 colors
20X CD ROM drive
3–1/2 inch floppy drive
Serial port (COM 1)
Serial Port (COM 2)
Parallel port (LPT 1)
PCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)
with a 10Base–T–to–coax adapter
S Windows 98 SE or higher operating system
NOTE
If 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the CDMA LMF
window must be maximized after it is displayed.
Ethernet LAN Transceiver (part of all LMF kits)
S PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter + Ethernet UTP Adapter 3COM Model –
Etherlink III 3C589B
used with
S Transition Engineering Model E–CX–TBT–03 10BaseT/10Base 2
Converter
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-15
1
ATP Tools and Materials
– continued
CDMA LMF Software
The Local maintenance Facility (LMF) application program is a
graphical user interface (GUI)–based software tool. This product is
specifically designed to provide cellular communication field personnel
with the capability to support the following CDMA Base Transceiver
Station (BTS) operations:
Installation
Maintenance
Calibration
Optimization
RS232 to GPIB Interface
One National Instruments GPIB–232–CT with Motorola
CGDSEDN04X RS232 serial cable or equivalent; used to interface the
LMF to the test equipment.
A Standard RS–232 cable can be used with the following modifications:
S Pin 8 (CTS) does not have to be jumpered/shorted to the others as
it is a driver output. The DTR is already a driver output signal.
The other pins are to receivers. Short pins 7, 1, 4, 6 on each cable end:
Figure 1-3: RS232–IEEE488 Converter Serial Cable Configuration
9–pin D (female)
9–pin D (female)
GND 5
5 GND
RX 3
2 TX
TX 2
3 RX
RTS 7
CTS 8
RSD/DCD 1
7 RTS
ON BOTH CONNECTORS SHORT
PINS 7 AND 8;
SHORT PINS 1, 4 AND 6
8 CTS
1 RSD/DCD
DTR 4
4 DTR
DSR 6
6 DSR
Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog
IS–95A/B–only test capability – The following communications system
analyzers which provide only IS–95A/B test capability are supported by
the LMF:
S Motorola CyberTest
S Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A/600 Analyzer including 83203B
CDMA Interface, manual control system card, and, for 1900 MHz
BTSs, 83236A/B PCS Interface
1-16
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
ATP Tools and Materials – continued
S Advantest R3465 Analyzer with R3561L signal generator
CDMA2000 1X and IS–95A/B test capability – The following
communications system analyzers which provide both CDMA2000 1X
and IS–95A/B test capability are supported by the LMF:
S Agilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP
8935) with option 200 or R2K for CDMA2000 1X support
S Agilent E4406A
S Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with Advantest R3562 Generator
for IS–95 and cdma200 1X testing
A combination of test equipment supported by the LMF may also be
used during optimization and testing of the RF communications portion
of BTS equipment when the communications system analyzer does not
perform all of the following functions:
S Frequency counter
S Deviation meter
S RF power meter (average and code domain)
S RF signal generator (capable of DSAT/CDMA modulation)
S Audio signal generator
S AC voltmeter (with 600–ohm balanced audio input and high
impedance input mode)
S Noise measurement meter
S C–Message filter
S Spectrum analyzer
S CDMA code domain analyzer
NOTE
Advantest R3267 with Advantest R3562 Generator are
capable of performing IS–95B and cdma2000 1X tests, if
the required options are installed.
GPIB cables
Two Hewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; 1 or 2 meters long used to
interconnect test equipment and LMF terminal.
Power meter
Gigatronics Model 8541C with 80601A power sensor capable of
measuring from –70 dBm to +23 dBm; supported by the LMF to
perform BTS Total Power measurement.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-17
1
ATP Tools and Materials
– continued
Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit
S Motorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors on
opposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a null
modem transformation between cables. This board can be used for
10–pin to 8–pin, 25–pin to 25–pin and 10–pin to 10–pin conversions.
S Motorola 30–09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent; used to interface
the LMF serial port connection to GLI, CSA and cCLPA debug serial
ports.
CDMA2000 1X signal generators
S Agilent E4432B signal generator (required for use with Agilent
E4406A when performing Frame Erasure Rate acceptance testing)
or
S Advantest R3562 signal generator (required for use with Advantest
R3267 when performing Frame Erasure Rate acceptance testing)
Power meter
S Hewlett Packard Model HP437B with HP8481A power sensor capable
of measuring from –30 dBm to 20 dBm
or
S Gigatronics 8542B power meter
Timing Reference Cables
S Two BNC–male to BNC–male RG316 cables; 3.04 m. (10 ft.) long,
Two BNC–male to BNC–male RG316 cables; 0.61 m. (2 ft.) long
with Two BNC “T” connectors, used to interconnect the
Communications Analyzer to CSA front panel timing references in the
BTS.
RF Attenuators
S 30 dB Fixed in–line attenuators, 150 W (Narda 769–30) used in
conjunction with calibration of test cables.
S 50 dB attenuator for connection to 30 dB directional coupler
Misc. Components (RF Adaptors, Loads, Cables, etc.)
S As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for
various test set ups. Should include at least (2) 50–Ohm loads (type
N) for calibration, (1) RF short, (2) RF cables, (1) GPIB Box, and (1)
ethernet cable.
RF Load
S 150W non–radiating RF load; used (as required) to provide dummy
RF loading during BTS transmit tests.
High–Impedance Conductive Wrist Strap
S Motorola Model 42–80385A59; used to prevent damage from
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) when handling or working with
modules.
1-18
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
ATP Tools and Materials – continued
Directional Coupler
S 30 dB attenuation
Optional Equipment
NOTE
Not all optional equipment specified here will be supported
by the LMF in automated tests or when executing various
measure type commands. It is meant to serve as a list of
additional equipment that might be required during
maintenance and troubleshooting operations.
Digital Multimeter
S Fluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for
precision dc and ac measurements, requiring 4–1/2 digits.
Frequency Counter
S Stanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent. If direct
measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references are required.
Spectrum Analyzer
S Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or
equivalent; required for manual tests other than standard Receive
band spectral purity and TX cCLPA IM reduction verification tests
performed by the LMF.
LAN Tester
S Model NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); Used to
supplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.
Span Line (T1 or E1) Verification Equipment
S As required for local application
RF Test Cable (if not provided with test equipment)
S Motorola Model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the
BTS transmitter output during optimization procedures.
Oscilloscope
S Tektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; used for waveform viewing,
timing, and measurements procedures.
CDMA Subscriber Mobile or Portable Radiotelephone
S CDMA compatible with power supply and antenna; used to provide
test transmission and reception during BTS maintenance. Two radios
will be required for system and drive around testing after optimization
and BTS ATP is completed.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-19
1
BTS Equipment Identification
Overview
Stand–Alone BTS
The 1X SC480 BTS consists of one shelf of cards and modules within a
metal cabinet. Depending on configuration the BTS may be powered by:
S Converted AC to –48 VDC
S Converted AC to +27 VDC
S Battery (–48 or +27 VDC)
S +27 VDC
S –48 VDC
The BTS can support up to two carriers in a non–redundant omni
configuration.
Figure 1-4 shows the two different front vies and Figure 1-5 shows the
rear view of the BTS.
Exapnsion BTS
When more than two carriers are desired, up to 3 additional BTSes may
be added. Up to 8 carriers can be supported in this configuration. The
Starter BTS has the Compact Multi–Preselector Card (cMPC) and the
expansion BTSes contain Expansion Compact Multi–Preselector Cards
(EMPC) in place of the cMPC. In expansion the BTSes are identified as
individual BTSes, (i.e.; BTS–100, BTS–200, BTS–300, BTS–400).
LAN connections are not used. The BTSes will share TX and RX
antennas. Reference Appendix E for interconnect diagrams.
Logical BTS
The BTS software implements the logical BTS capability. Previously, all
BTS frames co–located at a single site had to be identified in the
network with separate and distinct BTS ID numbers. In the Logical BTS
feature, all BTSes located at a single BTS site are identified with unique
Frame ID numbers (Frame ID Numbers 1, 101, 201, 301) under a single
(site) BTS ID number. A logical BTS can consist of up to three BTSes
(up to 8 carriers). When the LMF is connected to the Starter of a logical
BTS, you can access all devices in all of the BTSes that make up the
logical BTS. A logical BTS requires a CDF/NECF file that includes
equipage information for all of the logical BTSes and their devices and a
CBSC file that includes channel data for all of the logical BTSes.
In this configuration LAN connections are used. The Starter BTS has the
Compact Multi–Preselector Card (cMPC) and the expansion BTSes
contain Expansion Compact Multi–Preselector Cards (EMPC) in place
of the cMPC. The BTSes will share TX and RX antennas. Reference
Appendix F for interconnect diagrams.
1-20
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
CCP2 Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers Logical
BTS
All cards/modules/boards in the BTSes at a single site, assigned to a
single BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbers
dependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to
Table 1-5 for specific device ID numbers. See Figure 1-6 for shelf
layout.
Table 1-5: CCP2 Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers for Logical BTS
BTS #
PSM
CSA
GLI3
–
–
101
–
101
101
101
102
103
101
104
–
201
–
201
201
201
202
203
201
204
–
301
–
301
301
301
302
303
301
304
–
MAY 2004
MCC
BBX
cMPC/E
MPC
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-21
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-4: Front View of Compact BTS
Front Panel
Cover
Standard CCP2 Shelf
Front Panel cover
removed
CCP2 Shelf with
MCC–DO card
Front Panel cover
removed
1-22
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-5: Rear View of Compact BTS
RF GPS not shown and
SDCX Module is shown.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-23
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Shelf Device ID Numbers for
Stand–Alone
All cards/modules/boards in the BTS at a single site assigned to a single
BTS are also identified with unique Device ID numbers. Refer to
Table 1-6 for the Device ID Numbers. Reference Figure 1-6 or
Figure 9-2 for the layout of the shelf.
Table 1-6: Shelf Device ID Numbers
BTS #
PS1
CSA
GLI
MCC
BBX
cMPC
–
Figure 1-6: CCP2 Shelf Layout
SYNC MONITOR
STA/ALM
FREQ. MONITOR
MMI
When used, the MCC–DO
is seated in MCC slots 1
and 2. MCC slot 3 can be
an MCC–1X or a filler
panel.
ti–cdma–wp–00310–v01–ildoc–ah
The following is a list of the cards/modules in CCP 2 Shelf and a brief
description.
1. Power Supply Module
2. CSA
1-24
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
GLI3
MCC–1X (or MCC–DO)
MCC–1X (or MCC–DO)
MCC–1X or Filler Panel
BBX–1X (Carrier 1)
BBX–1X (Carrier 2)
cMPC
Power Supply Module
Occupies the first slot. The same assembly used in the SC48XX series.
Provides power to the cards on the CCP2 shelf.
CSA Card
Occupies the second slot. The Clock Synchronization Alarm card,
combines the functions of the SC4812’s CSM and AMR cards into one.
The CSA timing circuit receives a 1pps signal from the GPS. The CSA
timing circuit generates the CDMA timing signal to the BBX and MCC
cards.
During normal operation the CSA is set up to select the GPS as the first
reference source. With an HSO or MSO as backup, the CSA is set up to
select the HSO or MSO 1 pps as the backup reference source should the
GPS signal fail. .
GLI3 Card
Occupies the third slot. The same card used in the SC48XX series.
Provides interfaces, inter–card communications, operation, and
maintenance functions for all the devices in the CCP2 shelf.
MCC–1X Cards and MCC–DO
Occupies the fourth through sixth slots (MCC slots 1, 2, & 3).
Depending on configuration they will be MCC–1X cards (16s, 32s, 48s,
or 64s). MCC–1X 64s require packet backhaul configuration. This
implements the traffic and control (sync, paging, access) channels of the
BTS.
If the BTS is configured for MCC–Data Only (DO), then MCC slots 1
and 2 will be used with slot 3 containing an MCC–1X card or a filler
panel.
BBX–1X Cards
Occupies the seventh and eighth slots (BBX slots 1 & 4). The same
BBX–1X cards used in the SC48XX series. Provides the RF to digital
signal functions for the reverse and forward links.
cMPC
Occupies the ninth slot. Compact BTS Multicoupler Preselector Card.
Provides low–noise amplification for all RX path signals. DC voltages
are monitored on the RF devices and regulators and are used to generate
hard and soft alarms.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-25
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
HSO and MSO
The High Stability and Medium Stability Oscillator module provide a
backup reference source should the Global Positioning System (GPS)
fail. The HSO is capable of providing up to 24 hours and the MSO is
capable of providing up to 8 hours.
Only one of either the HSO or MSO is available in the Compact BTS.
The module is located in front, behind a cover, underneath the CCP2
Shelf. The unit slides into the top slot of the two that are present.
Modem
The slot underneath the HSO/MSO slot is reserved for a Modem
module, however it is not supported for the SC480.
BTS Rear Panel
LAN connectors, RF Connectors, circuit breaker, DC Power connection,
RF GPS, and SDCX are found at the rear of the BTS.
CBIO Board
Figure 1-7 shows the RF GPS, SDC, TME, PDE, cPA, Customer I/O
connectors, and Status indicators.
RF GPS
The optional Radio Frequency Global Positioning System (RF–GPS) is
contained in a module that plugs in to the CBIO board at the rear of the
BTS. It can be used in place of the RGPS. See Figure 1-7.
SDCX
The Synchronization Daisy–Chaining and eXpansion (SDCX) module is
only used when there are expansion BTSs at the site. It supports timing
distribution for up to three expansion frames, and also supports
synchronization daisy–chaining feature. See Figure 1-7.
LAN Connectors
LAN input and out put connectors for 10BaseT connection are found at
the upper right rear of the BTS. See Figure 1-7. There are LAN output
connectors on the front panel below the CCP2 Shelf. See Figure 1-4.
1-26
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-7: CBIO Board
TME Alarm
LAN
RF–GPS
PWR
Expansion
TX
RF–GPD IN
PDE Alarm
Customer
Input/Output
CBIO LEDs
Network Span
1X–A, –B, & –C
Expansion RX
Main
Group 1 Span
DO–A, –B, & –C
EXPANSION FRAME SYNC – OUT
Expansion RX
Diversity
DAISY–CHAIN POWER
SDCX
SDCX POWER
cCLPA
Data A & B
SDCX KIT NO.
SDCX SERIAL NO.
DAISY–CHAIN SYNC – OUT
Directional
Coupler
See
Figure 1-8 or
Figure 1-9
Frame ID
Switch
ti–cdma–wp–00311–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-27
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
RF Connectors
Figure 1-8 shows the RF connectors at the rear of the Compact BTS.
Modem Connector
Figure 1-8 shows the Modem connector at the rear of the Compact BTS
(not supported in SC480).
Circuit Breaker
Figure 1-8 and Figure 1-9 show the location of the –48VDC 20A circuit
breaker and +27VDC 25A circuit breaker, respectively.
DC Power Connection
Figure 1-8 and Figure 1-9 shows the location of the DC Power Terminal
Strip.
Ground
Figure 1-8 shows the location of the two ground screw holes for the
Compact BTS.
Figure 1-8: –48 VDC RF Connectors, Circuit Breaker, DC Power Terminal Strip, and
Ground Studs
20A Circuit
Breaker
GROUND
(Screw Holes)
1-28
DC Power
Terminal Strip
–48 V
+0 V
TME
+0V
20A
–48V
TME
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-9: +27VDC RF Connectors, Circuit Breaker, DC Power Terminal Strip, and
Ground Studs
25A Circuit
Breaker
25
TME
25A
GROUND
(Screw Holes)
MAY 2004
DC Power
Terminal Strip
+27 V RETURN TME
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-29
1
Outdoor Enclosure Equipment Identification
Outdoor Enclosure Equipment
Identification
Figure 1-10 shows the TME and HMS outdoor enclosures.
Figure 1-10: Thermal Managment Enclosure and Heat Manaagement System
Wall Mounting
Bracket
Heat Management
System
Thermal
Management
Enclosure
Compact BTS
Thermal Management
Enclosure
The following are brief descriptions of the components of the TME.
TME
The Thermal Management Enclosure surrounds the Compact BTS,
affording it protection against the weather. See Figure 1-10.
HMS
The Heat Management System attaches to the TME and provides
temperature regulation of the Compact BTS. See Figure 1-10.
PDA
The Power Distribution Assembly is the connection point for the –48
and +27 VDC. Also, it contains circuit breakers for the TME and 1U
(optional module). Connections to the HMS and BTS are also provided
at the rear of the unit.. See Figure 1-11.
1-30
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-11: Power Distribution Assembly
(–48V version shown)
ti–cdma–wp–00350–v01–ildoc–ah
Power Distribution Enclosure
The following are brief descriptions of the components of the PDE.
PDE
The Power Distribution Enclosure converts AC voltage to DC voltage
for use by the TME and Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier
(cCLPA). Battery backup is routed through the PDE. See Figure 1-12.
S AC Load Center (ACLC) – Where the AC voltage is connected to the
PDE. Also contains AC surge protection.
S Power Supply Module (PSM) – Converts the 220–240 VAC to –48 V
DC for use by the TME, BTS, and cCLPA.
S Power Management Alarm Card (PMAC) – Monitors alarms for PDE
and battery backup.
S Circuit Breakers (CB) – Provides DC surge and DC short circuit
protection.
S Punch Block (PB) – Distribution point for incoming and outgoing
data signal lines.
S Multiple ground connections at the reaar of the PDE
S Antenna surge arrestors slots
HX
The Heat Exchanger attaches to the PDE and provides temperature
regulation.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-31
1
Outdoor Enclosure Equipment Identification – continued
Figure 1-12: Power Distribution Enclosure and Heat Exchanger
Power
Management
Enclosure
Heat Exchanger
Antenna Surge
Arrestor Location
Ground
Location
Combined Compact Linear
Power Amplifier
Figure 1-13: Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier
ti–cdma–wp–00300–v01–ildoc–ah
1-32
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Installation and ATP Order
Indoor Installation Order
The pieces of the BTS should be installed in the following order.
1. Unpack and inspect hardware
2. Install mounting hardware and bracket (s)
3. Attach and secure unit to mounting bracket
4. Install GPS
5. Prepare site cabling
6. Attach all ground cabling to unit(s)
7. Attach all cables to unit(s)
Outdoor Installation Order
The pieces of the BTS should be installed in the following order.
1. Unpack and inspect hardware
2. Install mounting hardware
3. Attach and secure units to mounting bracket(s).
4. Attach all ground cabling to unit(s).
5. Prepare site cabling
6. Install GPS.
7. Install antennas
8. Attach AC power cable to PDE
9. Connect DC Power cables between PDE and TME
10. Connect DC power cables between PDE and cCLPA
11. Connect optional Battery Backup cable to PDE
12. Attach all interconnection cables to unit(s).
ATP Order
The following should already be installed on the laptop computer
S WinLMF
The ATP for the BTS is performed in the following sequence:
1. BTS preparation
2. Connecting the LMF computer to the BTS
3. Connecting test equipment to the BTS and LMF
4. Establishing an MMI communications session
5. Setting customer operating channel
6. Synchronization verification
7. Start WinLMF and log on to BTS
8. Update BTS–specific CDF file device load version
9. Download and enable MCC
10. Test equipment setup (Calibration/GPIB address & clock setup)
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
1-33
1
Installation and ATP Order – continued
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
1-34
Test equipment selection
Power meter calibration
Test cable calibration
Create CAL file
RF path audit
TX and RX Acceptance tests
Generate an ATP Report
Copy WinLMF CAL file to Floppy Disc
Terminate LMF session/leave the site
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Chapter 2: Site Preparation
Table of Contents
MAY 2004
Site Preparation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifications and procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifications and inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
Site Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deficiencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What to Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna and Transmission Line Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structural Inspections and Verifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-4
Prepare Site for the Arrival of the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Arrival . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Fluorescent Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure to Prepare the Site for the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Equipment is Shipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Equipment Arrives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Fluorescent Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking a Cardboard or Wood Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Outdoor Equipment from a Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Indoor Equipment from a Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-11
2-11
2-13
Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cCLPA Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TME Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-18
2-20
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
TME Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDE Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDE Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-22
2-23
2-25
2-25
MAY 2004
Site Preparation Overview
Overview
This chapter provides the procedures and information to verify that the
site is ready to have the equipment installed. It also provides procedures
to ensure the safety of the installation personnel, protect the equipment
from damage, and verify the site layout parameters.
Installation
This SCt480 BTS can be installed indoors. The site preparation
depends on the type of installation and the site characteristics. Battery
back up is optional and provided by the customer.
Verifications and procedures
The verifications and procedures provided in this chapter are:
S Internal site inspections
S Preparing site for the arrival of equipment
S Site layout verification
Site manager
The site manager is the person in charge of and responsible for the full
site.
Verifications and inspections
Verifications typically have the installer check with the site manager that
a condition has been previously checked or procedure previously
performed and meets a stated specification.
Inspections typically have the installer personally checking that a
condition or item meets stated specifications.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-1
Site Inspections
Inspection overview
Inspect the site to verify that the necessary equipment has been properly
installed. Also, as part of the inspection, verify that the equipment is
adequate to support the Motorola equipment. Not all inspections may
apply to every site. The site characteristics determine which inspections
apply.
NOTE
Installation of ancillary equipment (e.g., power supplies,
terminal blocks, etc.) may be the responsibility of the
installer. Refer questions to your Motorola Program
Manager.
Deficiencies
Notify responsible personnel of any deficiencies as soon as possible, if
the installer is not responsible for correcting the noted deficiencies.
Deficiencies may need to be corrected before any installation can start.
What to Inspect
The following external items should be inspected and compared against
any related site-specific documentation.
S Antennas
S External ground systems
S Clearances for units
S Mounting Structures
Additionally, for all sites the incoming power should be inspected and
compared against any related site-specific documentation.
Antenna and Transmission
Line Inspections
Documentation
The vendor(s) responsible for supplying other equipment have left
installation documentation at the site. Review this documentation and
compare it with any related site-specific documents.
Inspection
Inspect the following:
S Antenna and transmission line installation
S Grounding.
Structural Inspections and
Verifications
Site power
Verify with the site manager that site power has been previously checked
and meets the specifications stated in the site-specific documentation.
2-2
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Site Inspections – continued
Cabling rack
Inspect the cable rack for proper installation. The cable racks should be
at least 7 ft from the floor. The cable racks should be electrically tied
together with 6 AWG wire, except cable racks that are in an isolated
ground zone.
Fire protection
For indoor installations verify with the site manager that some type of
fixed fire suppression equipment is installed. The possible types are:
S Halon gas system, recommended for cell sites because:
– Halon extinguishes a fire without removing oxygen from a room.
– Halon is clean, allowing for quick cleanup after a fire.
– Halon will not damage the cell site equipment.
S CO2 (carbon dioxide) system.
S Sprinkler system. “Dry pipe” sprinkler systems that remove all power
to a room before filling the overhead sprinklers with water are
recommended.
WARNING
In addition to the fixed fire suppression equipment, there
should be at least two 5-lb ABC class portable fire
extinguishers on the premises before equipment installation
begins.
Fire Fighting Procedures
Cellular infrastructure equipment contains various materials which can
decompose into toxic compounds during intense heat. When fire
fighting conditions are severe, wear full protective clothing, including
helmet, self–contained, positive pressure or pressure demand breathing
apparatus, bunker coat and pants, bands around arms, waist and legs,
face mask, and protective covering for exposed areas of the head.
Antenna cables and ports
Inspect the antenna cables and ports to verify that:
S All antenna cables have been properly labeled.
S Antenna ports have been properly weatherproofed.
S An adequate number of ports exist to handle all of the required
antenna runs.
S Lightning arrestors have been installed at the building or shelter entry
point.
S For some systems, special ports may be required (refer to the
site-specific information for further details).
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-3
Site Inspections
– continued
Grounding Inspections
Indoor installations
For indoor installations refer to the Grounding Guideline for Cellular
Radio Installations (68P81150E62) for all grounding inspection
procedures.
Verify the following:
S All ground cables have a bend radius of 20 cm (8 inches) or more.
S Metallic lines (span, phone[modem], RGPS, power and antenna) that
enter or leave the site should be equipped with a 3-electrode gas tube
protector. The ground side of the gas tubes should be tied to the
Master Ground Bus (MGB).
S All installed cable racks (in the same ground zone) are jumpered
together.
WARNING
Cable racks in an Isolated Ground Zone (IGZ) are not to be
connected to a cable rack in a non-IGZ. For more
information on IGZ, see Grounding Guideline for Cellular
Radio Installations, Motorola part number 68P81150E62
or Appendix C of Standards and Guidelines for
Communications Sites (Motorola part number
9882904Y01)
Outdoor Installations
For outdoor installations refer to the Grounding Guideline for Cellular
Radio Installations (Motorola part number 68P81150E62) or Appendix
C of Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites (Motorola part
number 9882904Y01) for all grounding inspection procedures.
Verify the following:
S All outdoor enclosures are grounded to system masrter ground.
S All enclosures have conduit attached.
S It is recommended that all metallic lines (span, RGPS, power, and
antenna) that enter or leave the site are be equipped with a surge
suppression device (lightning arrestor).
2-4
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Prepare Site for the Arrival of the Equipment
Description
This information covers various topics not all of which are needed at
every site. Based on the site characteristics execute the steps that apply
to your site. Before installing the equipment, do the following to ensure
the safety of installation personnel and to protect the equipment.
Equipment Arrival
Before the equipment arrives, indicate to the transport company an area
at the site where the equipment can be unloaded and, if necessary,
unpacked. The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site, along
with all equipment dollies and padding required to safely move the
equipment from the unloading area to the cell site. The following should
also be provided, outdoor weather protection, temporary lighting and
power for lighting and power tools.
Securing Fluorescent Lights
Figure 2-1 illustrates the use of tape to secure fluorescent tubes. Secure
any fluorescent tubes that may be hit or damaged by any unit, cable, or
personnel.
Figure 2-1: Securing Lights with Tape
Apply masking tape to keep
fluorescent tubes in place in
the fixtures.
MAY 2004
0150–O_IL.doc
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-5
Prepare Site for the Arrival of the Equipment
– continued
Procedure to Prepare the Site
for the Equipment
Table 2-1: Procedure to Prepare the Site for the BTS
Step
Action
If some type of protective padding is available install it around any existing equipment at the site that
could be damaged during installation of the unit(s).
Hang plastic sheets around intended work areas to prevent dust and debris from damaging co-located
equipment during installation.
Secure any fluorescent tubes in place using masking tape. (Refer to Figure 2-1.)
NOTE
This will prevent the tubes from being inadvertently jarred from the fixtures during the installation of
equipment or cables.
Locate the demarcation blocks for external utilities.
Verify that they are shown on the Site Engineering documents, and determine the required cable
routing back to the equipment frames.
Verify the following:
2-6
DC power is available and meets the site documentation specifications (if applicable).
Cable rack is installed per site document specifications.
Outdoor cable runs are installed and meet local building codes.
Span line termination tie points are available.
Customer input termination tie points are available.
There is clear access to move the equipment to the desired mounting area.
There is sufficient space for installation and service access to the equipment.
Customer supplied shelters are installed.
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Unpacking the Equipment
Description
The Purpose of this section is to describe how the SC480 Compact BTS,
TME, PDE, and cCLPA are packaged for shipping and how to correctly
unpack the units in preparation for installation.
How Equipment is Shipped
The equipment are shipped in either cardboard or wood containers. The
equipment are shipped with all internal cabling installed. For an indoor
installation, the BTS is shipped in a single container. BTS accessories
are shipped in their own container. If used, the cCLPA and accessories
are shipped in a single container. Also, the Mounting Plate and BTS
Mounting Bracket are shipped in a separate container.
For an outdoor configuration, the Thermal Management Enclosure
(TME) and Wall Mounting Bracket are shipped in a single containter.
The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) is shipped in a separate container.
BTS accessories are packed separately and shipped in a container. The
Power Distribution Enclosure (PDE), and Compact Combined Linear
Power Amplifier (cCLPA) with their respective accessories, are shipped
in separate containers.
Conduit piping and batteries for backup power are customer supplied.
How Equipment Arrives
Before the equipment arrives, indicate to the transport company an area
at the site where the equipment can be unloaded and, if necessary,
unpacked. The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site, along
with all equipment dollies and padding required to safely move the
equipment from the unloading area to the cell site. The following should
also be provided, outdoor weather protection, temporary lighting and
power for lighting and power tools.
Securing Fluorescent Lights
For indoor configuration, Figure 2-1 illustrates the use of tape to secure
fluorescent tubes. Secure any fluorescent tubes that may be hit or
damaged by any unit, cable, mechanical lift, or personnel.
Unpacking Process
The unpacking process requires that the following procedures be
completed in the order shown:
1. Unpack the shipping container
2. Inventory the shipping container
3. Inspect equipment for damage
Recommended Tools
The tools in Table 2-2 are recommended to assist in opening the
containers housing the equipment.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-7
Unpacking the Equipment
– continued
Table 2-2: Recommended Unpacking Tools
Qty
Description
Tin Snips
Knife, Box Cutter, or Scissors
Unpacking Diagrams
The following diagrams show how to unpack the equipment.
WARNING
The steel bands surrounding the container can spring out
from the container when the bands are cut. To avoid
personal injury, stand safely to one side of the bands while
cutting.
The approximate weights of the containers (with
packaging):
TME: 50 kgs (100 lbs)
BTS: 30 kgs (150 lbs)
PDE :40 kgs (85 lbs)
cCLPA: 22 kgs (48 lbs).
Mounting Plate/BTS Mounting Bracket: 7 kgs (15 lbs).
2-8
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Unpacking the Equipment – continued
Figure 2-2: Wood Shipping Container
Wood Crate
Top
NOTE:
1. Normally this styrofoam
packing is attached to the
pallet. it is shown exploded
for clarity
2. This example shows the TME
shipping container.
Wall Mounting
Bracket
container
Styrofoam
Packing
TME
Styrofoam
Packing
Wood Crate
ti–cdma–wp–00347–v02–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-9
Unpacking the Equipment
– continued
Figure 2-3: Cardboard Shipping Container
Wall Mounting
Bracket
cardboard Box
Cardboard Lid
Insert with
Packing
Styrofoam
Packing
NOTE:
1. Normally this styrofoam
packing is attached to the
pallet. it is shown exploded
for clarity
2. This example shows the TME
shipping container.
TME
Styrofoam
Packing1
Cardboard
Box
Wood Pallet
ti–cdma–wp–00347–v01–ildoc–ah
2-10
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Unpacking the Equipment – continued
Unpacking a Cardboard or
Wood Container
Follow the procedure in Table 2-3 to unpack equipment from a container.
Table 2-3: Unpacking Equipment from a Cardboard or Wood Container
Step
Action
Inspect the container for damage.
Cardboard Container
Open container using tin snips to cut each outer steel band or a knife (or equivalent) to cut the plastic
wrap that surrounds the container.
Remove equipment door key from top of container.
Lift off the cardboard cover.
Proceed to Table 2-4 or Table 2-5.
Wood Container
Perform step 1.
Loosen latches at the bottom of the container.
Remove clips holding the top pallet , and remove pallet from the container.
Remove equipment door key from pallet.
10
Proceed to Table 2-4 or Table 2-5.
Removing Outdoor Equipment
from a Container
Follow the procedure in Table 2-4 to remove the outdoor equipment
from a container. The following procedure starts with the TME removal
and continues through to the Pole Mounting Assembly. The order of
opening containers is not important, it is just for demonstration
purposes. The procedure is written for one set. Perform procedure as
many times as required to accommodate the site configuration.
Table 2-4: Procedure to Remove Outdoor Equipment from Container
Step
Action
Open shipping container holding TME. Perform Table 2-3.
Remove the box containing the Wall Mounting Bracket from the insert.
Remove insert.
Remove cage style packing material surrounding the TME.
Using a knife or equivalent, carefuly cut through protective bag enclosing TME.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-11
Unpacking the Equipment
– continued
Table 2-4: Procedure to Remove Outdoor Equipment from Container
Step
Action
n WARNING
The TME and HMS are shipped as one unit. Together they weigh 39 kg (86 lbs). It is recommended
that the HMS be removed first; otherwise, two people are required to remove the TME with HMS
installed.
Use the key to unlock the HMS and open.
Use a wrench to remove two nuts and washers securing ground cable to HMS.
Disconnect signal cable from TME.
Remove HMS from TME hinges and place on a flat surface.
10
Remove TME and place on its backside on a flat surface.
11
Open shipping container holding PDE. Perform Table 2-3.
12
Remove box containing the Wall Mounting Bracket from insert.
13
Remove insert.
n WARNING
The PDE and HX are shipped as one unit. Together they weigh 52 kg (115 lbs). It is recommended
that a minimum of two people be required to remove the PDE with HX installed.
13a
Remove PDE and place on its backside on a flat surface.
14
Open shipping container holding cCLPA. Perform Table 2-3.
! CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the cooling fins on the cCLPA.
14a
Remove cCLPA and place on its backside on a flat surface.
15
Remove associated accessories and place on a flat surface.
16
Open shipping container holding BTS. Perform Table 2-3.
17
Remove box containing RGPS or Local GPS (RF–GPS) antenna and cabling, and place on a flat
surface.
NOTE
RGPS or RF–GPS may have been shipped in a separate container.
18
Remove packing surrounding BTS.
19
Remove BTS and place on a flat surface.
20
If system is to be pole mounted proceed to step 21; otherwise, proceed to step 23.
21
Open shipping container holding Pole Mounting Assembly.
22
Remove Pole Mounting Bracket Assembly from container and set on a flat surface.
23
Take inventory of equipment received. Report the extent of any equipment damage to the transport
company and to appropriate management personnel.
2-12
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Unpacking the Equipment – continued
Removing Indoor Equipment
from a Container
Follow the procedure in Table 2-5 to remove the indoor equipment from
a container. The following procedure starts with the BTS removal and
continues through to the Mounting Plate. The order of opening
containers is not important, it is just for demonstration purposes. The
procedure is written for one set. Perform procedure as many times as
required to accommodate the site configuration.
Table 2-5: Procedure to Remove Indoor Equipment from Container
Step
Action
Inspect containers for damage. Use tin snips or knife to cut straps holding Mounting Plate container to
the BTS container.
Open container holding Mounting Plate and accessories.
Remove Mounting Plate and accessories and place on a flat surface.
Open shipping container holding BTS.
Remove box containing RGPS or Local GPS (RF–GPS) antenna and cabling, and place on a flat
surface.
Remove insert.
Remove packing surrounding BTS.
Remove BTS and place on a flat surface.
NOTE
If a cCLPA has also been shipped, proceed to step 9; otherwise, proceed to step 12.
Open shipping container holding cCLPA. Perform Table 2-3.
10
Remove packing surrounding cCLPA.
! CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the cooling fins on the cCLPA.
11
Remove cCLPA and place on a flat surface.
12
Take inventory of equipment received. Report the extent of any equipment damage to the transport
company and to appropriate management personnel.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-13
Dimensions and Clearances
BTS Overview
This information covers the dimensions and clearances associated with
the BTS for indoor configurations.
Dimensions and Clearances
Table 2-6, Table 2-7, and Figure 2-4 through Figure 2-7 show the
installed dimensions and recommended clearances for each item.
Table 2-6: Installation Dimensions for the BTS
Item
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
BTS
(fully
installed)
425 mm
(17 in.)
218 mm
(9 in.)
626 mm
(25 in.)
23 kg
(50 lbs)
Table 2-7: Minimum Clearances for the BTS
Item
Front
Back
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Installation and
Maintenance
Requirements
680 mm
(27 in.)
400 mm
(16 in.)
50 mm
(2 in.)
50 mm
(2 in.)
50 mm
(2 in.)
0 mm
(0 in.)
Functional
Requirements
50 mm
(2 in.)
50 mm
(2 in.)
50 mm
(2 in.)
50 mm
(2 in.)
50 mm
(2 in.)
0 mm
(0 in.)
2-14
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Dimensions and Clearances – continued
BTS Dimensions
The BTS dimensions are shown below.
Figure 2-4: Overall Dimensions of BTS
218 mm
Front cover installed
425 mm
626 mm
ti–cdma–wp–00302–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-15
Dimensions and Clearances
– continued
cCLPA Dimensions and
Clearances
Table 2-8, Table 2-9, and Figure 2-5 show the installed dimensions and
recommended clearances for each item.
Table 2-8: Installation Dimensions for the cCLPA
Item
Height
Length
Width
Weight
cCLPA
261 mm
(10 in.)
495 mm
(19 in.)
295 mm
(12 in.)
20 kg
(44 lbs)
Table 2-9: Minimum Clearances for the cCLPA
Item
Front
Back
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Installation and
Maintenance
Requirements
680 mm
(27 in.)
0 mm
(0 in.)
*150 mm
(6 in.)
*150 mm
(6 in.)
100 mm
(4 in.)
**500 mm
(20 in.)
Functional
Requirements
680 mm
(27 in.)
0 mm
(0 in.)
150 mm
(6 in.)
150 mm
(6 in.)
100 mm
(4 in.)
500 mm
(20 in.)
* Dimension shown accommodates the handles. Without handles 0 mm is the minimum.
** Minimum of 1 M (40 in) for ground clearance.
2-16
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Dimensions and Clearances – continued
Figure 2-5: cCLPA Dimensions and Functional Clearances
Top Clearance
100 mm minimum
NOTE:
Overall length of cCLPA is from
mounting flange to mounting
flange.
487.0 mm
Side Clearance
150 mm minimum
Side Clearance
150 mm minimum
295.0 mm
Bottom Clearance
500 mm minimum
Bottom Clearance
1 M minimum above
ground
Front Clearance
680 mm minimum
260.0 mm
Rear Clearance
0 mm minimum
ti–cdma–wp–00301–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-17
Dimensions and Clearances
– continued
Unit Clearances
The unit clearances are shown below.
Figure 2-6: Indoor Functional Clearances for BTS
Side Clearance
50 mm minimum
Mounting Plate
Front Clearance
50 mm minimum
NOTE:
For access to RF filter
tray, remove BTS from
the shelf.
Top View
Rear Clearance
50 mm minimum
Compact BTS
Side Clearance
50 mm minimum
NOTE:
If there is only one cCLPA, then
the top clearance is 100 mm (4
in.) minimum. The clearance
above a single BTS is 125 mm (5
in.) minimum.
100 mm minimum
clearance
For two BTSs the clearance is
250 mm (10 in.) minimum. See
Figure 2-7.
If two cCLPAs are used, the
clearance between them is 625
mm (20 in.) minimum. See
Figure 2-7.
125 mm minimum
clearance
BTS can be mounted
on either side of the
mounting plate
Side View
2-18
Front View
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Dimensions and Clearances – continued
Figure 2-7: Indoor Functional Clearances for BTS Side–By–Side Configuration
NOTE:
For access to RF filter tray
remove BTS from the shelf.
Seated side–by–side on the
mounting plate does not interfere
with BTS ventilation.
Side Clearance
50 mm minimum
Front Clearance
50 mm minimum
Top View
Rear Clearance
50 mm minimum
Side Clearance
50 mm minimum
NOTE:
The 100 mm (4 in.) clearance above
the cCLPA only applies if there is a
single cCLPA present.
If two cCLPAs are used, the clearance
between the cCLPAs is 625 mm (25 in. )
minimum.
Top Clearance
100 mm minimum
625 mm minimum
clearance
NOTE:
Normal clearance for cCLPA above
BTS is 125 mm (5 in.) minimum.
If two BTSs are used, the clearance
is 250 mm (10 in.) minimum.
250 mm minimum
clearance
Side View
MAY 2004
Front View
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-19
Dimensions and Clearances
– continued
TME Dimensions and
Clearances
Table 2-10, Table 2-11, Figure 2-9, and Figure 2-10 show the TME
installed dimensions and recommended clearances.
Table 2-10: Installation Dimensions for the TME
Item
Height
Length
Width
Weight
TME
530 mm
(21 in.)
738 mm
(29 in.)
448 mm
(18 in.)
34 kg
(75 lbs)
Table 2-11: Minimum Clearances for the TME
Item
Front
Back
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Installation and
Maintenance
Requirements
705 mm
(30 in.)
51 mm
(2 in.)
600 mm
(24 in.
600 mm
(24 in.)
80 mm
(3 in.)
*1000 mm
(39 in.)
Functional
Requirements
100 mm
(30 in.)
51 mm
(2 in.)
300 mm
(12 in.)
300 mm
(12 in.)
80 mm
(3 in.)
*1000 mm
(39 in.)
* Minimum of 1 Meter for ground clearance.
Figure 2-8: TME
ti–cdma–wp–00357–v01–ildoc–ah
2-20
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Dimensions and Clearances – continued
Figure 2-9: Overall Dimensions of the Thermal Management Enclosure
738 mm
530 mm
ti–cdma–wp–00354–v01–ildoc–ah
448 mm
ti–cdma–wp–00353–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-21
Dimensions and Clearances
– continued
TME Clearances
Figure 2-10 shows the recommended clearances for the TME.
Figure 2-10: Functional Clearances for TME
Rear Clearance
51 mm
Side Clearance
300 mm
Side Clearance
300 mm
Front Clearance
100 mm
Top Clearance
80 mm
Bottom Clearance
1M
2-22
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Dimensions and Clearances – continued
PDE Dimensions and
Clearances
Table 2-12, Table 2-13, and Figure 2-11 and Figure 2-12 show the
installed dimensions and recommended clearances for each item.
Table 2-12: Installation Dimensions for the PDE
Item
Height
Length
Width
Weight
PDE
*350 mm
(14 in.)
810 mm
(32 in.)
473 mm
(19 in.)
52 kg
(115 lbs)
* Mounting Bracket extends an additional 186 mm (7 in) beyond
bottom of TME.
Table 2-13: Minimum Clearances for the PDE
Item
Front
Back
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Installation and
Maintenance
Requirements
760 mm
(30 in.)
51 mm
(2 in.)
334 mm
(13 in.)
334 mm
(13 in.)
150 mm
(6 in.)
*150 mm
(6 in.)
Functional
Requirements
300 mm
(12 in.)
51 mm
(2 in.)
150 mm
(6 in.)
150 mm
(6 in.)
150 mm
(6 in.)
*150 mm
(6 in.)
* Minimum of 1 Meter for ground clearance.
Figure 2-11: PDE
ti–cdma–wp–00336–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-23
Dimensions and Clearances
– continued
Figure 2-12: PDE Overall Dimensions
810 mm
760 mm
350 mm
186 mm
473 mm
444 mm
305mm
ti–cdma–wp–00270–v01–ildoc–ah
2-24
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Dimensions and Clearances – continued
PDE Clearances
Figure 2-13 shows the recommended clearances for the PDE.
Figure 2-13: Functional Clearances for PDE
Rear Clearance
51 mm
Side Clearance
150 mm
Side Clearance
150 mm
Front Clearance
300 mm
Top Clearance
150 mm
Bottom Clearance
1M
Outdoor Clearances
Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15 show the minimum clearances for the
outdoor configuration.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-25
Dimensions and Clearances
– continued
Figure 2-14: Mulitple Pole Installation and Functional Clearances for Enclosures and PA
BTS with TME/HMS, PDE HX, & PA
Electrical connections
not shown
PA 2
TME 2&4, PDE 2, and
PA2 are attached on
the opposite side of the
pole.
PA 1
Front View
TME 3
10 Meters
1000 mm
Minimum
PDE 2
Partial
Side View
PDE 1
1000 mm
Minimum
TME 2
TME 1
Ground Level
2-26
1000 mm
Minimum
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Dimensions and Clearances – continued
Figure 2-15: Multiple Wall Installation and Functional Clearances for TME and HMS, PDE, and
cCLPA
PA #2
PA #1
A possible layout is
shown.
Electrical connections
not shown
10 Meters
Battery Backup not
shown. Batteries are
connected through
the PDE.
Wall
TME #2
1000 mm
Minimum
TME #3
TME #1
1000 mm
minimum
1000 mm
Minimum
PDE #1
PDE #2
1000 mm
Minimum
Front View
Ground Level
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
2-27
Dimensions and Clearances
– continued
Notes
2-28
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Chapter 3: BTS Cables
Table of Contents
MAY 2004
Cable Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurations Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Installation Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Lug Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer I/O Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling for EV–DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
Power, Earth Ground, and Battery Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indoor Power Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor Power Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
Antenna Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna Cable Pin and Signal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6
Span Line and RGPS Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Pin and Signal Information for Span Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Pin and Signal Information for RGPS Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-8
Remote GPS Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGPS Mounting Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
Local GPS (RF–GPS) Antenna Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-12
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Cable Description
Overview
This chapter provides the procedures to install the BTS site cabling, but
not attach it to the BTS .
Connect the cables to the site and route them to the BTS location.
Procedures for attaching the cables to the BTS is contained in Chapter 4.
NOTE
Cabling is one of the most noticeable aspects of
workmanship. Straight runs and proper turns are critical for
a positive evaluation of the work.
Configurations Supported
This chapter supports cable installation for single carrier omni
configurations.
Cabling Installation Order
To install the cables, Motorola recommends that the following
procedures be completed in the order shown:
1. Earth ground cabling
2. Power cabling
3. Antenna cabling
4. Span cabling
5. cCLPA Data cable
6. RGPS/Local GPS/HSO/MSO cabling (HSO/MSO optional)
7. Customer I/O cabling
8. EV–DO (MCC–DO) Cabling
Cable Labels
The “Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers” in Table 3-1 provides cable
descriptions and part numbers. The labels used to designate the cables in
that area are used throughout this chapter.
Ground Lug Specification
Ground lugs with the following specification is recommended for use
with the system.
S ILSCO P/N: CRB–6L2–14–58 – Two Hole, Long Barrel lug
connector, 6 AWG, 1/4–inch diameter, 5/8–inch stud hole spacing,
13/32 Tang width
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
3-1
Cable Description
– continued
Customer I/O Connector
The recommended connector for Customer Input and Output is listed
below:
S Input Connector: Molex, terminla plugs, P/N 39352–0106
S Output Connector: Molex, terminla plugs, P/N 39352–0108
Cable Descriptions and Part
Numbers
Table 3-1 gives the cable descriptions and part numbers for the cables
used to install the BTS.
Table 3-1: Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Description
Customer
Supplied
Ground cable, 6 -AWG, insulated copper wire. Requires one two–hole
lug connectors.
1–6
Andrew
LDF4–50
Customer
Supplied
Antenna Cable, 800 MHz, length selections: 10 m (31 ft.)
T472AA
RGPS cable, 15 m (50 ft.)
T472AB
RGPS cable, 38 m (125 ft.)
T472AC
RGPS cable, 76 m (250 ft.)
T472AD
RGPS cable, 152 m (500 ft.)
T472AE
RGPS cable, 304 m (1000 ft.)
T472AF
RGPS cable, 608 m (2000 ft.)
C1
3086433H07
Customer
Supplied
Span cable, 4 or 8 conductors, 24–28 AWG stranded, twisted pair
Customer
Supplied
Customer Input/Output cable, 0–8 conductors, 18–24 AWG stranded
wire
Customer
Supplied
DC power cable with crimped lugs, 8–10 AWG, 10 m, stranded,
designed for –60 to –40 VDC power input
Customer
Supplied
RJ45 cable for BTS to cCLPA
1–11
3086039H18
RGPS Synchronization cable (part of kit SGKN4351A)
3086039H19
RGPS Synchronization cable (part of kit SGKN4352A)
J**
Supplied in Kit
SGRG4030
Punchblock to CBIO Board, 15 pin D–connector on one end and loose
wires on the other end.
Local GPS Cable, 1/2–inch coaxial, length = 50 ft. Two male N–type
connectors, one end to be terminated after routing of cable
table continued on next page
3-2
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
MAY 2004
PRELIMINARY
Cable Description
– continued
Table 3-1: Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Description
Customer
Supplied
AC power cable, 10 AWG, copper, designed for 200 – 240 VAC @ 25
A.
L{
2–7
Customer
Supplied
DC power cables, 8–10 AWG, stranded, designed for –60 to –40 VDC
power input
*Quantity of cables depends upon system configuration. Your system may require one or more Motorola kits.
Refer to Motorola Kits for Multi–Unit Installations for more information
** An SMA to N adapter is required; otherwise, a cable must be made with an SMA connector on one end
{ Length of cables are dependent upon BTS equipment layout.
Cabling for EV–DO
Information regarding EV–DO (MCC–DO) cabling can be found in
1xEV–DO Hardware Installation manual – 68P09257A95
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
3-3
Power, Earth Ground, and Battery Cabling
Objective
The objective of this procedure is to install the power and earth ground
cabling for the BTS at the site.
WARNING
Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present
in this equipment. Use extreme caution when handling and
testing this equipment.
Grounding Considerations
This procedure covers only the grounding information for the cable that
attaches to the BTS.
NOTE
Motorola recommends that you use an oxide inhibitor such
as Burndy PENETROXt or Ilsco DE–OXt on all the
external ground connections on the unit and on the site I/O
interface for all outdoor installations. This includes the
ground connections on the mounting bracket, the Site I/O,
and the lugs on the customer–supplied site I/O interface.
Above Ground
For ground rings and the interconnection of internal and external ground
rings, #2 AWG or larger is required. For grounding of equipment and
miscellaneous metallic objects, #6 AWG miminum is required.
Exceptions – Connection from an isolated ground bar (IGB) to master
ground bar (MGB) is accomplished using #2 AWG as a minimum. The
external ground bar (EGB) is grounded through a 2–inch wide, 16–gauge
copper strap, if available; otherwise, 2–#2 AWG wires can be used. If the
#2AWG wires are used, then they must be connected at opposite ends of
the EGB and have a minimum separation of 12–inches between them.
Below Ground
All wire must be #2 AWG as a minimum. Ground rods are to be a
minimum of 8 feet long and 5/8–inch in diameter. In the case of a deep
basement next to the rod, the rod must be long enough to extend 3 feet
below the basement floor.
3-4
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Power, Earth Ground, and Battery Cabling – continued
Indoor Power Considerations
The BTS is designed for –60 to –40 VDC power input.
The power for the Indoor BTS configuration is:
S DC power
Outdoor Power
Considerations
The TME/BTS and cCLPA are designed for –60 to –40 VDC power
input from the PDE.
The PDE is designed for 200–240 VAC input.
The power for the Outdoor BTS configuration is:
S AC power
S DC power (converted from AC)
S DC power (Battery Backup if used)
NOTE
Neither the “+” or “–” terminal of the DC Input is
connected to the BTS ground. If a negative supply input is
provided, the “+” terminal of the DC input must be
connected to the Master Ground Bar. By connecting the
“+” terminal of the DC input to the MGB, a –48VDC
(nominal) system is created.
The system configuration determines which power cables are installed.
The ground cable is always installed first. Based on the system
configuration perform the appropriate procedures described in Chapter 4.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
3-5
Antenna Cabling
Cable Labels
The cable designations are referenced to Table 3-1 in the “Cable
Description” area of this chapter.
Required Cables
Table 3-2 provides the quantities and descriptions of the cables.
Table 3-2: Cables Needed for Antenna Connections
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Description
1 to 4*
Andrew
LDF4–50
Customer Supplied
Antenna Cable, 800 MHz, 10 m (31 ft.)
* Four cables are required if a cCLPA is used, otherwise, two are needed for the BTS only.
Antenna Cable Pin and Signal
Information
The antenna cabling uses a 50–Ohm coaxial cable. The inner conductor
provides signaling and the outer conductor provides shielding and
ground.
Figure 3-1: Antenna Cabling Details
ANTENNA CABLE (COAXIAL)
CONNECTOR
INNER
CONDUCTOR
OUTER
CONDUCTOR
Table 3-3: Pin and Signal Information for Cable B (Antenna Cable)
Antenna
3-6
Inner Conductor
Outer
Conductor
TX/RX
Ground
RX
Ground
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Span Line and RGPS Cabling
Cable Labels
The cable designations are referenced to Table 3-1 in the “Cable
Description” area of this chapter.
Required Tools and Materials
Table 3-4 provides the quantities and descriptions of the cables.
Table 3-4: Cables Needed for Span/RGPS Connections
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Description
T472AA
RGPS cable, 15 m (50 ft.)
T472AB
RGPS cable, 38 m (125 ft.)
T472AC
RGPS cable, 76 m (250 ft.)
T472AD
RGPS cable, 152 m (500 ft.)
T472AE
RGPS cable, 304 m (1000 ft.)
T472AF
RGPS cable, 608 m (2000 ft.)
C1
3086433H07
Punchblock to CBIO Board, 15 pin D–connector on one end and
loose wires on the other end.
1–3
Customer Supplied
1 –4*
7687717T02
Span cable, 4 or 8 conductors, 24–28 AWG stranded, twisted pair
Ferrite, clip–on core
* One Ferrite bead per cable.
Cable Pin and Signal
Information for Span Cabling
Table 3-5 gives the pin and signal information for the Span cable.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
3-7
Span Line and RGPS Cabling – continued
Table 3-5: Pin/Signal Information for Span Cable
BTS Interface
Span Line Cable
Pin
Wire/Stripe
Color
Description
White/Orange
Orange
White/Green
Blue
White/Blue
Green
NC
White/Brown
NC
Brown
NC
RX RING
RX TIP
NC
TX RING
TX TIP
Cable Pin and Signal
Information for RGPS Cabling
Table 3-6 gives the pin and signal information for the RGPS cable.
Connector must be a 15 pin, D–Sub, female.
Table 3-6: RGPS Pin/Signal Name Information
Pin
3-8
Signal Name
DATA +
(From Head)
SYNC +
(From Head)
SYNC + (Not used for RGPS connection, daisy
chain use between BTSs only)
DATA +
NC
NC
RGPS +28V Supply
RGPS +28V Supply
DATA –
(From Head)
10
SYNC –
(From Head)
11
SYNC –
(To Head)
12
DATA –
(To Head)
13
NC
14
RGPS Return
15
RGPS Return
(To Head)
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Remote GPS Head
Objective
The objective of this procedure is to show how to install the Remote
Global Positioning System (RGPS) head.
Required Tools and Materials
One RGPS Head (Motorola Part Number 0186012H03 or 0186012H04)
is required to do this procedure.
RGPS Mounting
Considerations
The RGPS Head requires specific mounting considerations in order to
properly observe the GPS satellites.
S The mounting pipe for the RGPS head should be mounted vertically
with less than five degrees (5_) of tilt.
S The RGPS head mounting hardware which comes with the RGPS
head should be used in all installations. This mounting hardware
properly isolates the painted metal base of the RGPS head from other
conductive surfaces. If the metal base comes in contact with another
conductive surface, the electrical surge resistance of the RGPS head
can be significantly reduced leading to RGPS head failure.
– If the supplier of the RGPS mounting hardware cannot be used, the
installer MUST make certain that the metal base of the RGPS head
does not make contact with any conductive surface.
S Position the RGPS head to have an unobstructed view of the sky and
to minimize the chance of debris (leaves, dirt, etc.) accumulating on
the radome of the RGPS head.
S The RGPS head must have a clear view of the sky, preferably to
within ten degrees (10_) of the horizon in all directions. The total
blockage of the sky (due to buildings, mountains, etc.) should be less
than 50%.
S Place the RGPS head as far away from the BTS transmit antenna as
possible to avoid RF interference issues.
S Place the RGPS head at least 15 m away from lightning rods, towers,
or structures that attract lightning. RGPS head damage is usually not
the result of a direct lightning strike, but of a lightning strike on a
nearby structure. Also, since a lightning rod is connected to an earth
ground, it can act as a shield and create a shadow that may block or
reduce the signal from a satellite.
S After the BTS is powered up, check the RGPS signal strengths with
the “gps_status” command on the CSA MMI port.
– An optimal installation will have at least one satellite (SV) with an
RSSI value ≥ 50, and at least four (4) satellites with RSSI values
≥ 45.
– A minimal installation should have at least four (4) satellites with
RSSI values ≥ 40.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
3-9
Remote GPS Head
– continued
S The RGPS head is rated for ambient air temperatures from –40°C
(–40°F) to 80°C (176°F), and has ratings for humidity, shock,
waterproof, UV light resistance, vibrations, salt fog, ESD, EMI, and
altitude.
S The RGPS system used for the SCt480 BTS will support up to 604
m (2000 ft.) of overall cable length from the RGPS head to the last
connected BTS. If a long cable run needs to be broken into pieces,
minimize the number of breaks in the cable.
S A Compact BTS equipped with an SDCX is capable of providing up
to three other BTSs with timing signals.
3-10
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Local GPS (RF–GPS) Antenna Cabling
Objective
The objective of this procedure is to install the Radio Frequency Global
Positioning System receiver (RF–GPS) antenna cabling. More
commonly referred to as Local GPS.
Cable labels
The cable designations referenced to Table 3-1 in the “Overall Cabling
and Descriptions” area.
Cabling diagram
Figure 4-48 shows the Local GPS antenna connections.
Equipment needed
Table 3-7 contains a detailed description of the Local GPS Cabling.
Table 1-4 lists the tools needed.
Table 3-7: Cabling for Local GPS
Cable
J*
Qty.
Part Number
Description
Supplied in Kit
SGRG4030
RF–GPS Cable, 1/2–inch coaxial, length = 50 ft. Two male N–type
connectors, one end loose.
If lengths greater than 50 ft. are required, cable style and length should
be determined by site configurations. Maximum loss <4.5 dB @ 1575
MHz for all cabling and connections between the Local GPS antenna
and the frame.
*An SMA to N adapter is required; otherwise, a smaller diameter cable must be made with an SMA connector
on one end, with a maximum loss of <4.5 dB.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
3-11
Local GPS (RF–GPS) Antenna Cabling – continued
Mounting Considerations
Table 3-8 lists the Local GPS Head requires specific mounting
considerations in order to properly observe the GPS satellites.
Table 3-8: Local GPS Antenna Mounting Considerations
Consideration
The mounting pipe for the Local GPS Head should be mounted vertically with less than five (5)
degrees of tilt.
The Local GPS Head requires a clear view of the sky, preferably to within ten (10) degrees of the
horizon in all directions. The more sky that is observed increases the number of potential satellites
that can be tracked, resulting in better Local GPS performance.
During normal operation, the Local GPS Head continuously tracks a minimum of four (4) GPS
satellites. However, it is theoretically possible to operate the BTS by tracking only one (1) GPS
satellite. Motorola does not recommend tracking only one (1) GPS satellite unless there has been
an accurate site survey.
Place the Local GPS Head where RF obstructions of the sky are minimal. The “sky” includes
everything to within ten (10) degrees of the horizon in all directions. RF obstructions include
buildings, towers, natural rock formations, snow, foliage, and debris.
Separate the Local GPS Head from other radiating sources. Excessive RF energy can degrade the
Local GPS Head’s ability to observe the GPS satellites. The Local GPS Head receives on the GPS
L1 frequency of 1575.42 MHz and incorporates filters to minimize the effects of potential RF
interference, however, strong radiants can overwhelm the filters, thus degrading the units reception
capability.
The Local GPS Head is rated for ambient air temperatures in the range –40 to + 50_C, and has
ratings for humidity, shock, waterproofing, UV light resistance, vibrations, salt, fog, ESD, EMI,
and altitude.
If the overall length of the Local GPS Head to the BTS is greater than 50 feet, the cable style and
length should be determined by the site configurations. The maximum loss should be less than
4.5 dBm @ 1575 MHz for all cabling and connections between the Local GPS Head and the
frame.
3-12
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Chapter 4: BTS and Cabling Installation
Table of Contents
MAY 2004
Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of EV–DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indoor/Outdoor Configuration Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor Configuration Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
Attaching BTS to Mounting Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure to Attach Mounting Plate to Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS to Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indoor cCLPA Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cCLPA Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cCLPA Mounting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cCLPA Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Connection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Cable Description and Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Cable Wiring Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Data Cable Connection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor cCLPA Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pole or Wall Mounting cCLPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-19
4-19
Thermal Management Enclosure Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TME Connectors and Conduit Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TME Conduit Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-23
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TME Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23
4-23
Compact BTS and HMS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact BTS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HMS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-30
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDE Conduit Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Bracket Assembly Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat Exchanger Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat Exchanger Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDE Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-36
4-36
4-37
4-39
4-40
4-40
4-41
Earth Ground Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indoor Grounding Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Ground Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor Grounding Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor Grounding Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDE Ground Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-46
4-46
4-46
4-46
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-49
4-52
BTS DC Power Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Cable Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cable and Connector Signal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect DC Power to TME Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-53
4-53
4-53
4-53
4-53
4-55
AC / DC Power Cabling Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Cable Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC and DC Power Cabling Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Backup Power Cabling Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDE to TME and cCLPA DC Power Cabling Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
4-57
4-57
4-57
4-57
4-58
4-58
Antenna Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-59
4-59
4-59
4-59
Span Line, RGPS, and RF GPS Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-63
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
MAY 2004
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
MAY 2004
– continued
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Span Line Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Pin and Signal Information for Span Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span Cable Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Customer–Defined Inputs to the CBIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGPS or RF–GPS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure to Install the RGPS Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the RGPS Cable to Lightning Arrestor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the RF–GPS Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-63
4-63
4-63
4-63
4-65
4-65
4-66
4-66
4-66
4-67
4-69
4-70
4-70
Customer Input / Output Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Input and Output Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-74
4-74
4-74
4-74
4-75
Site Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove Protective Covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove Debris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-76
4-76
4-76
4-76
4-76
4-76
4-76
Installation Completion Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indoor Installation Completion Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-77
4-77
4-77
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
MAY 2004
PRELIMINARY
Installation Overview
Overview
This chapter provides the procedures for BTS installation and cabling.
The site cabling has been installed and routed to the location of the BTS.
In this chapter, the cables will be attached to the unit(s). Cabling
installation will be repeated as necessary for each unit at the BTS.
This chapter provides the information and procedures to:
Assembling the BTS mounting hardware
Attach cables to the BTS
Power to BTS
Complete the installation completion checklist
Procedure order
Indoor
The process of installing the indoor unit requires that the following
procedures be completed in the order shown:
1. Mount and secure Mounting Plate to rack
2. Attach angle bracket to BTS
3. Secure BTS to the Mounting Plate
4. Attach Earth ground cable to BTS
5. Connect DC Power cable to BTS
6. Attach antenna cable
7. Mount and secure cCLPA mounting bracket to rack (if used)
8. Mount and secure cCLPA to mounting bracket (if used).
9. Attach Earth ground cable to cCLPA
10. Connect DC Power cable to cCLPA
11. Connect data cable between cCLPA and BTS
12. Terminate unused connectors
13. Perform Pre–Power checks
14. Power on the units
15. Clean up site
16. Fill out the installation completion checklist
Outdoor
The process of installing the outdoor unit requires that the following
procedures be completed in the order shown:
1. Attach the mounting brackets to wall or pole mounting bracket
assemblies
2. Detach HMS from TME
3. Mount TME onto mounting bracket
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-1
Installation Overview – continued
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Mount BTS inside TME
Attach HMS to TME
Detach Heat Exchanger from PDE
Mount PDE onto mounting bracket
Attach Heat Exchanger to PDE
Mount PA onto mounting bracket
Attach earth ground cables
Attach the DC input power cable
Attach DC output power cables
Attach antenna cable
Attach PA data cables
Terminate unused connectors
Power on the unit
Clean up site
Fill out the installation completion checklist
Installation of EV–DO
Information regarding the installation of a BTS equipped with EV–DO
(MCC–DO) can be found in 1xEV–DO Hardware Installation manual –
68P09257A95
4-2
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Connector Locations
Connector Locations
Figure 4-1 shows the location of the cable connectors on the BTS. The
system configuration determines which connectors are used. Figure 4-2
is a detail of the connectors on the rear of the BTS.
Figure 4-1: Rear View of BTS
RGPS Connector and
SDCX Module are
shown.
PWR
RF–GPD IN
Note:
1. The LAN Connections
should be terminated with
50–Ohm loads.
2. The Expansion TX and RX
ports should be terminated
with SMA 50–Ohm loads.
EXPANSION FRAME SYNC – OUT
DAISY–CHAIN POWER
SDCX POWER
SDCX KIT NO.
SDCX SERIAL NO.
DAISY–CHAIN SYNC – OUT
ti–cdma–wp–00311–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-3
Connector Locations – continued
Figure 4-2: Detail of Antenna Connectors and DC Power (Rear of BTS)
Circuit Breaker
TME
+0V
–48V
20A
GROUND
Location and
GROUND LUG
DC Power
Terminal Strip
Indoor/Outdoor Configuration
Connectors
cCLPA Connectors and Conduit Locations
Refer to Figure 4-7 for connectors and conduit locations
Outdoor Configuration
Connectors
TME Connectors and Conduit Locations
Refer to Figure 4-16 for connectors and conduit locations
PDE Conduit Locations
Refer to Figure 4-23 for conduit locations
4-4
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Attaching BTS to Mounting Rack
Objective
The objective of this procedure is to attach the BTS to the Rack.
Background
The mounting plate is attached to the Rack, then a mounting bracket is
attached to the BTS. Finally, the BTS is attached to the Mounting Plate.
Required Tools and Materials
The following tools and materials are required to attach the BTS to the
Mounting Plate.
MAY 2004
Torque driver wrench, 1/4–in. hex female drive, 0–10 N–M
T30 Star tamper bit
Three (3) M6X16 screws (Motorola Part No. 0310907D03)
Three (3) isolation washers (Motorola Part No. 4309874U03)
Six (6) customer supplied rack screws (Check manufacturer’s
specifications)
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-5
Attaching BTS to Mounting Rack – continued
Procedure to Attach Mounting
Plate to Rack
Follow the procedure in Table 4-1 to attach the Mounting Plate to the
Rack. Refer to Figure 4-3.
Table 4-1: Procedure to Attach Mounting Plate to Rack
Step
Action
Determine where in the rack the Mounting Plate is to be attached.
Ensure that the mounting plate is level.
Set Mounting Plate similar to what is shown in Figure 4-3.
Attach Mounting Plate to Rack using four (4) customer supplied rack screws. Torque screws to
manufacturer’s specifications.
Figure 4-3: Attaching Mounting Plate to Rack
Four (4) rack screws
are required for
attching mounting plate
to rack. Two per side.
ti–cdma–wp–00301–v01–ildoc–ah
4-6
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Attaching BTS to Mounting Rack – continued
BTS Mounting Bracket
Perform the procedure in Table 4-2 to attach the bracket to the BTS.
Table 4-2: Procedure to Attach BTS Mounting Bracket
Step
Action
Atttach mounting bracket as indicated in Figure 4-4.
Using two (2) isolation washers and 2 M6 screws securely attach the mounting bracket to the forward
most holes on the BTS. Torque screws to 5 N–M (44 in–lbs).
Figure 4-4: Attaching Mounting Bracket to BTS
Hole not used.
MOUNTING
BRACKET
2 M6 SCREWS &
2 ISOLATION
WASHERS
ti–cdma–wp–00302–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-7
Attaching BTS to Mounting Rack – continued
BTS to Mounting Plate
Perform the procedure in Table 4-3 to attach the BTS to the Mounting
Plate.
Table 4-3: Procedure to Attach BTS to Mounting Plate
Step
Action
NOTE
The Compact BTS weighs 12 Kg (22 lbs).
Place BTS on Mounting Plate as indicated in Figure 4-5. BTS bracket holes align with rack holes.
Secure BTS bracket to rack using two (2) customer supplied screws. Torque screws to manufacturer’s
specification.
At the rear of the BTS, use one M6 screw and isolation washer to secure the BTS to the mounting
plate. Torque screw to 5 N–M (44 in–lbs).
Figure 4-5: Attaching BTS to Mounting Plate
Two (2) rack screws are
required for attaching
BTS to rack.
One (1) M6 screw and
isolation washer is
required to attach BTS
to rack. See Figure 4-6.
ti–cdma–wp–00303–v01–ildoc–ah
4-8
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Attaching BTS to Mounting Rack – continued
Figure 4-6: BTS Rear Attachment
One M6 screw and
isolation washer for
attaching BTS to
mounting plate.
ti–cdma–wp–00305–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-9
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation
Objective
This section contains general information for installing a Compact
Combined Linear Power Amplifier (cCLPA).
Cable Description
The following cable in Table 4-4 is necessary to do this procedure.
Table 4-4: DC Input Cable Description and Part Number
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Customer
Supplied
Description
DC input cable with crimped lugs, 8–10 AWG, 10 m, designed for
–60 to –40 VDC power input.
Required Tools
The following are the tools required :
Torque driver wrench, 1/4–in. hex female drive, 0–10 N–m
T20 Torx Tamper Bit, 1/4–in. hex
T30 Torx Tamper Bit, 1/4–in. hex
Wire Crimping Tool
Indoor cCLPA Installation
The cCLPA is mounted directly to a 19–inch rack. Placement of cCLPA
is up to the customer. The maximum allowable TX cable loss (including
surge arrestor) from the cCLPA to the BTS is 2.0 dB. The maximum
allowable RX cable loss (including surge arrestor) from the cCLPA to
the BTS is 3.0 dB. The cCLPA receives –60 to –40 VDC. from the
Power Distribution Enclosure (PDE).
4-10
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation – continued
cCLPA Connectors
Figure 4-7 shows the location of the cCLPA connectors.
Figure 4-7: Bottom View of cCLPA
FORWARD
REFLECTED
ANTENNA
RX OUT
TX INPUT
REMOVABLE
HANDLE
REMOVABLE
HANDLE
20A Circuit
Breaker
DC INPUT
DATA INPUT
ti–cdma–wp–00298–v01–ildoc–ah
IMPORTANT
The cCLPA requires its own DC power source that is
different than the power source assigned to the Compact
BTS.
cCLPA Mounting Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 4-5 to attach the cCLPA to the rack.
Table 4-5: Procedure to Mount the Power Amplifier
Step
Action
Place two screws (one each on each side of the rack). See Figure 4-8.
Holding onto handles, mount the cCLPA onto the two screws.
Secure cCLPA to rack using 4 screws. See Figure 4-8. Torque screws to to10 N–M (88 in–lbs).
NOTE
Handles of cCLPA may be removed if mounting space is limited.
Remove 2 screws each securing handles to cCLPA prior to mounting.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-11
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation – continued
cCLPA Grounding
Cable Description
Since the length of this cable varies from site to site, no specific length is
assigned. Table 4-6 lists the components required to build a ground
cable.
Table 4-6: Ground Cable and Lug Description and Part Number
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Customer
Supplied
Ground cable, 6 -AWG, insulated copper wire.
Customer
Supplied
Two Hole, Long Barrel lug connector, 6 AWG, 1/4–inch diameter,
5/8–inch stud hole spacing, 13/32 Tang width.
Description
Figure 4-8: cCLPA Mounting to Rack
Mounting Hole
Location for
cCLPA
Rack
Screw for
Mounting
cCLPA
Screw for
Mounting
cCLPA
Screws
Screws
4-12
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation – continued
Follow the procedure in Table 4-7 to attach the ground cable to the
cCLPA.
Table 4-7: Procedure to Ground the cCLPA
Step
Action
If not already done, remove handles from cCLPA.
Retrieve ground lug and cabling.
2a
Using a wire stripper, trim back 1/2–inch of the ground cable insulation from each end.
2b
Using a crimp tool crimp the lug onto one end of the cable.
2c
Attach the ground clamp to the opposite end of the ground cable.
Using one screw attach the ground cable and lug to one of the holes left vacant by the removal of the
handles. See Figure 4-9.
Slide ground clamp over ground anchor and secure using a lockwasher. Use a 13mm socket to tighten
the hex nut. Use a torque wrench to tighten hex nut to 10.0 N–M (88 in–lbs).
Use tie–wraps as required to dress the ground cable.
Figure 4-9: cCLPA Grounding
After handle is
removed attach
ground lug
ti–cdma–wp–00361–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-13
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation – continued
DC Power Connection
Procedure
A –48 VDC power source is required to supply the cCLPA. Follow the
procedure in Table 4-8 to attach the DC Power cable to the cCLPA.
Table 4-8: Procedure to Attach DC Power Cable to the cCLPA
Step
Action
Set DC Power source circuit breaker to OFF.
Route cable (F) from DC Power source to the cCLPA. See Figure 4-10
Remove 8 screws securing I/O Panel cover and remove.
Route cable through connector to DC Power Terminal Block. See Figure 4-10.
If not already loosened, loosen DC Power Terminal Block screws.
Strip approximately 12 mm (1/2–inch) of sheathing from the end of each wire.
Insert the ”+” wire (red) into the “+” opening of the DC Power Terminal Block, then secure it by
tightening the screw. Torque screw to 2.3 N–M (20 in–lbs).
Perform step 6 for the “–” wire.
Insert the “–” wire (blue) into the “–” opening of the DC Power Terminal Block, then secure it by
tightening the screw. Torque screw to 2.3 N–M (20 in–lbs).
10
If the Data Cable is not installed, proceed to Table 4-11; otherwise, proceed to Table 5-6 for
Pre–Power up Test.
4-14
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation – continued
Figure 4-10: DC Power Connection to cCLPA
cCLPA
Separate DC
Power Source
–48 VDC CABLE
DC IN
CONNECTOR
(F)
ti–cdma–wp–00297–v01–ildoc–ah
Close In View of cCLPA I/O
Board DC Power Connection
Data Cable Description and
Part Number
Table 4-9 lists the cable required to perform this procedure. Since the
cable length will vary from site to site, it will be left to the customer to
build the data cable desired.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-15
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation – continued
Table 4-9: Data Cable Description and Part Number
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Customer
Supplied
7687717T02
Description
RJ45 cable for BTS to cCLPA
Ferrite, clip–on core
Data Cable Wiring Information
Table 4-10 lists the wiring information required to manufacture the
CBIO–to–cCLPA Data Cable. Figure 4-11 shows the location of Pin 1
on the RJ45 connector.
Table 4-10: Data Cable Wiring Scheme
CBIO Signal Name
Wire Color
RJ45 Pin
Outs
cCLPA Signal Name
Txx_ACT_P
White/Orange
CLPA_485_TX_ACT_P
Txx_ACT_N
Orange
CLPA_485_TX_ACT_N
CLPA_x_ADDR
White/Green
CLPA_485_ADD_0
RxD_x_P
Blue
CLPA_485_TX_A_P
RxD_x_N
White/Blue
CLPA_485_TX_A_N
GROUND
Green
GROUND
TxD_P
White/Brown
CLPA_485_RX_A_P
TxD_N
Brown
CLPA_485_RX_A_N
Figure 4-11: CBIO–to–cCLPA Data Cable RJ45
Connector
Wires inserted
in this end
Pin 1
4-16
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation – continued
BTS Data Cable Connection
Procedure
Once the Data Cable has been built, follow the procedure in Table 4-11
to connect the BTS Data cable to the cCLPA.
Table 4-11: Procedure to Attach BTS Data Cable to cCLPA
Step
Action
If not already performed, remove 8 screws securing I/O Panel cover.
Route BTS Data cable to the cCLPA. See Figure 4-12.
Mate Data cable RJ45 plug to I/O Board RJ45 socket. See Figure 4-12. Table 4-10 identifies the data
cable wiring.
If there are two cCLPAs in use, bundle cables together and place ferrite core around cables. Ensure
that the cables are not being pinched before closing and latching the ferrite core.
Slide ferrite core as close to the BTS connectors as possible without causing stress. Use a tie–wrap on
the ferrite core side away from the connector. The tie–wrap holds the ferrite core in place
Install I/O Panel Cover and secure using 8 screws. Torque screws to 2.3 N–M (20 in–lbs).
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-17
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation – continued
Figure 4-12: Data Cable Connection Diagram for Compact BTS to cCLPA
NOTE:
1. Not to scale.
2. Ferrite bead is used in
indoor configuration
only
Ferrite Core
RF–
GP
D IN
To cPA–A
Connector
on CBIO
DATA IN
CONNECTOR
To RJ45 Connector on
cCLPA I/O Board
Compact BTS
Close In View of cCLPA I/O Board Data Cable
Connection
DATA CABLE
4-18
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation – continued
Outdoor cCLPA Installation
The cCLPA is mounted on a bracket assembly and secured to a pole.
Placement of cCLPA is up to the customer. The cCLPA is already
weatherproofed, so there are no special weather related precautions
required for outdoor installation. The maximum allowable TX cable loss
(including surge arrestor) from the cCLPA to the BTS is 2.0 dB. The
maximum allowable RX cable loss (including surge arrestor) from the
cCLPA to the BTS is 3.0 dB. The cCLPA operates on –60 t0 –40 VDC
supplied by the Power Distribution Enclosure (PDE).
Pole or Wall Mounting cCLPA
Follow the procedure in Table 4-12 to pole or wall mount the cCLPA.
Table 4-12: Procedure to Pole or Wall Mount the cCLPA
Step
Action
Determine where on the pole or structure the cCLPA will be mounted. Consult site configuration
documentation as required.
For wall or other such structure, proceed to step 2a. For pole mount, proceed to step 2c.
2a
Using the Wall Mounting Bracket as a template, drill starter holes, using the wider of the two sets
present. Screw in one each M6 anchor bolt in the upper holes.
2b
Hang Wall Mounting Bracket on anchor bolts. Install remaining anchor bolts and secure bracket by
tightening the 4 M6 anchor bolts. Torque anchor bolts to 10 N–M (88 in–lbs). Proceed to step 3.
2c
Center the Wall Mounting Bracket on Pole Mounting Bracket Assembly and install the 4 M6 screws in
the narrower of the two sets of holes present. Secure bracket by tightening the 4 M6 screws. Torque
screws to 10 N–M (88 in–lbs). Proceed to step 3. See Figure Figure 4-13.
Install two M6 screws in the top holes of the Wall Mounting Bracket.
n WARNING
It is recommended that two people hang the cCLPA onto the Wall Mounting Bracket.
Hang cCLPA and install remaining 4 M6 screws. Secure cCLPA to bracket by tightening screws.
Torque screws to 10 N–M (88 in–lbs).
If not already done, remove handles from cCLPA.
Perform Table 4-7 to install the ground cable.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-19
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier Installation – continued
Figure 4-13: Pole Mounting BracketAssembly
Figure 4-14 shows the cCLPA being attached to the Wall Mounting
Bracket. Reference Figure 4-13 for the Pole Mounting Bracket
Assembly.
Figure 4-14: Wall Mounting Bracket and cCLPA
For wall mount
For pole mount
cCLPA
Wall Mounting Bracket
ti–cdma–wp–00278–v01–ildoc–ah
4-20
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Thermal Management Enclosure Installation
Objective
This section contains general information for installing a Thermal
Management Enclosure (TME). These procedures are utilized if the
BTS site is configured for outdoor use.
The purpose of the TME (Figure 4-15) is to protect the BTS from the
weather. The Compact BTS is installed in the TME and some cables are
connected to interior TME connectors, while others are routed out
through access holes. Figure 4-17 shows the Wall Mounting Bracket and
Pole Mounting Bracket Assembly.
The TME can be pole or wall mounted. The Heat Management System
(HMS) is attached to the TME and is used to regulate temperature within
the TME.
The TME is replaced as a whole should damage to the exterior no longer
allow protection from the environment or if damage should occur to the
TME connectors .
Figure 4-15: Thermal Management Enclosure and Heat Management System
ti–cdma–wp–00320–v01–ildoc–ah
Electrical Requirements
The TME is powered by DC voltage that has been converted from an AC
power source by the PDE or from battery backup routed through the
PDE. Power required is –48VDC nominal, range is –60 to –40 VDC.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-21
Thermal Management Enclosure Installation – continued
Environmental Requirements
The following lists the environmental requirements of the TME:
S Operate Temperature: –50° to +75°C
Storage Temperature: –40° to +60°C
Operating/Storage Humidity: 10 to 95%, non–condensing
Cold Start: –40° to 0°C
Seismic: Per Telecordia GR–63–CORE Zone 4
Weight Requirement
S TME: 18 kg (40 lbs)
S Heat Management System: 11.5 kg (26 lbs)
S Wall Mounting Bracket: 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs)
TME Connectors and Conduit
Locations
Figure 4-16 shows the connectors and conduit locations
Figure 4-16: Bottom View of TME
EXPANSION Cable
Conduit Location
RF–GPS
Connector
FIBER OPTICS
Conduit Location
TX 1
Connector
TX 2
Connector
RX DIV
Connector
RX MAIN
Connector
DATA Cable
Conduit Location
POWER Cable
Conduit Location
ti–cdma–wp–00321–v01–ildoc–ah
4-22
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Thermal Management Enclosure Installation – continued
TME Conduit Sizes
The following are the conduit sizes required for connecting to the TME.
Reference Figure 4-16.
Table 4-13: TME Conduit Sizes
No.
Designation
Data and Expansion
TME Power Input
Fiber Optic
Required Size
(Inches)
1–1/2
1/2
Materials
Tools
The following tools are required to install the TME:
Torque Screwdriver
Drill, 3/8–inch or 1/2–inch drive
Appropriate concrete or wood drill Bits
Tie–Wraps
Appropriate size conduit (Metallic sealtight)
Bucklestrap Cutting Tool (Motorola P/N 6604809N01)
Safety Glasses
Heavy Gloves
Electrical Tape
Tape Measure
Hammer, ball–peen
TME Installation
Pole Mount
Follow the procedure in Table 4-14 to pole mount the TME. Figure 4-17
shows the Mounting Bracket Assembly and Wall Mounting Bracket.
Check site documents to verify that pole and supporting hardware are
capable of handling the load created by mounting the BTS system.
WARNING
Once TME is installed, DO NOT use it as a step ladder. It
will not support a person standing on top or hanging from
it.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-23
Thermal Management Enclosure Installation – continued
Table 4-14: Procedure to Pole Mount the TME
Step
Action
Slide non–buckle end of strap through openings in Pole Mounting Bracket Assembly.
Set Pole Mounting Bracket Assembly with straps at the desired height.
NOTE
Initial height is determined by customer. The bottom of the TME is a minimum of 1 meter from the
ground. Adjust Pole Mounting Bracket Assembly to account for this minimum distance.
Wrap strap around the pole, slide non–buckle end through strap loop and pull snug.
Attach Bucklestrap Cutting Tool (slide strap through openings in tool, pull gripper lever to slide strap
into spindle head), slide tool towards buckle. Place cutting tool end of tool as close to the buckle as
possible.
NOTE
The strap can be cut to a more manageable length prior to using the tool. Bucklestrap Cutting Tool is a
ratchet spindle and cutter in one.
Turn spindle clockwise until strap is tight.
Use cutter lever to cut strap.
Using the tool bend the strap over towards the buckle .
Remove tool and use a hammer to bend the strap more.
Use the hammer to bend buckle tabs over strap.
10
Use electrical tape to cover over the buckle and straps.
11
Perform step 3 through step 10, for the remaining straps.
12
Secure Wall Mounting Bracket to Pole Mounting Bracket Assembly using 8 M6 screws. Torque
screws to 3.4 N–M (30 in–lbs). See Figure 4-17.
n WARNING
The TME weighs 22 kg (48 lbs). One person is able to mount the TME on the Wall Mounting Bracket.
It is recommended that two people or one person using a mechanical lift to mount the TME onto
mounting bracket.
Do not place the Compact BTS inside the TME prior to placing it on the mounting bracket.
Remove the HMS prior to mounting the TME.
13
Set the TME onto the Wall Mounting Bracket. Ensure that it rests in the slots of the Wall Mounting
Bracket. See Figure 4-17.
14
Secure the TME to the mounting bracket using 6 M6 screws. Torque screws to 3.4 N–M (30 in–lbs).
See Figure 4-18.
4-24
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Thermal Management Enclosure Installation – continued
Figure 4-17: Wall Mounting Bracket and Pole Mounting Bracket Assembly
Slots for hanging the TME
Isolation
Washer
Pole
Mounting
Straps
Shoulder
Washer
M6
Screw
Pole Rest
Isolation Pad
ti–cdma–wp–00317–v01–ildoc–ah
Wall Mount
Follow the procedure in Table 4-15 to wall mount the TME. Refer to
Figure 4-17 for the Wall Mounting Bracket. Check site documents to
verify that wall structure and supporting hardware are capable of
handling the load created by mounting the BTS system.
WARNING
Once TME is installed, DO NOT use it as a step ladder. It
will not support a person standing on top or hanging from
it. DO NOT mount HMS and leave it in the open position.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-25
Thermal Management Enclosure Installation – continued
Table 4-15: Procedure to Install Mounting Bracket on a Wall
Step
Action
Select a suitable wall position such that the bottom of the TME is a minimum of 1 meter above the
ground.
NOTE
Check site documentation for further information.
Position Wall Mounting Bracket on wall and mark hole locations.
Drill starter holes for the anchor bolts.
Secure Wall Mounting Bracket to wall using 8 M6 anchor bolts. Torque anchor bolts to 3.4 N–M (30
in–lbs).
n WARNING
The TME weighs 18 kg (40 lbs). One person is able to mount the TME on the Wall Mounting Bracket.
It is recommended that two people or one person using a mechanical lift mount the TME onto
mounting bracket.
Do not place the Compact BTS inside the TME prior to placing it on the mounting bracket.
Do not attach HMS to the TME prior to mounting the TME.
Hang TME on Wall Mounting Bracket. Mounting bar on the rear of the TME is set into the cutouts on
the Wall Mounting Bracket.
Secure the TME to the Wall Mounting Bracket using 6 M6 screws. Torque screws to 3.4 N–M (30
in–lbs). See Figure 4-18.
4-26
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Thermal Management Enclosure Installation – continued
Figure 4-18: TME Screw Mounting Location
Screw Hole
Location
ti–cdma–wp–00334–v01–ildoc–ah
Screw Hole Locations
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-27
Compact BTS and HMS Installation
Objective
This section contains general information for installing a Compact BTS
in a Thermal Management Enclosure (TME).
WARNING
Once the outdoor enclosures are installed, they are not to
be used as steps or other types of climbing aids. They
were not designed to support a person.
Compact BTS Installation
Follow the procedure in Table 4-16 to install the BTS inside the TME.
Table 4-16: Procedure to Install Compact BTS in a TME
Step
Action
Verify that the TME is securely fastened to the mounting bracket.
Lift and slide the Compact BTS into the TME (See Figure 4-19).
n WARNING
The Compact BTS weighs 25 kg (55 lbs). One person is able to mount the BTS inside the TME. It is
recommended that two people or one person using a mechanical lift mount the BTS inside the TME.
Once placed in the proper position, slide the Compact BTS inside the TME.
Secure the Compact BTS to the TME with 5 M6 screws. (See Figure 4-19). Torque screws to 3.4 N–M
(30 in–lbs).
If not already open, unlock and open the left–hand door to the TME.
! CAUTION
Ensure that DC power to TME/BTS is disengaged.
Attach ground lug (part of TME) to BTS using two M6 screws.
Remove protective cover from BTS DC Power connector and connect DC power cable from TME
Power Distribution Assembly.
Connect the “+” wire (red, marked +0V) to the +0 V terminal.
Connect the “–” wire (blue, marked –48V) to the –48V terminal.
10
Connect the other blue wire (marked TME) to the TME terminal.
11
Connect the TX and RX cables to the appropriate TME connectors.
12
Connect RGPS or Local GPS (RF–GPS) cable to CBIO.
4-28
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Compact BTS and HMS Installation – continued
Figure 4-19: Thermal Management Enclosure and BTS
HMS is removed for
clarity.
Once BTS is in place
install M6 screws at
these locations
ti–cdma–wp–00262–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-29
Compact BTS and HMS Installation – continued
HMS Installation
In an outdoor configuration, the HMS module is part of the Thermal
Management Enclosure (TME). It is external to the TME and its
purpose is to regulate the heating and cooling of the Compact BTS
within the TME. See Figure 4-20.
Figure 4-20: Heat Management System (HMS)
INTERIOR VIEW
EXTERIOR VIEW
ti–cdma–wp–00318–v01–ildoc–ah
ti–cdma–wp–00319–v01–ildoc–ah
Follow the procedure in Table 4-17 to install the Heat Management
System (HMS).
Table 4-17: Procedure to Install the HMS
Step
Action
Once the TME and BTS are installed, attach the HMS to the TME.
NOTE
HMS weighs 11.5 kg (26 lbs).
table continued on next page
4-30
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Compact BTS and HMS Installation – continued
Table 4-17: Procedure to Install the HMS
Step
Action
Set the HMS on the hinges located on the TME (See Figure 4-21).
Use a driver wrench with socket to attach ground lug to HMS ground connection.
Connect the Data/DC PowerCable to HMS controller.
Dress cables as necessary.
Ensure that door swings freely and does not pinch any cables.
Close HMS and secure using the two draw latches. Fold draw latch handles down. Verify that HMS is
fully closed and seated.
Close draw latch door and lock using key.
Figure 4-21: HMS Installation
Set HMS on TME hinges.
HMS
TME
ti–cdma–wp–00320–v02–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-31
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation
Objective
This section contains general information for installing a Power
Distribution Enclosure (PDE) with Heat Exchanger (HX). See
Figure 4-22.
The optional PDE is a stand–alone unit external to the TME.
When in use, the PDE provides Primary surge for input power, customer
alarms, GPS, external antenna(s) and span lines; in addition to AC/DC
power conversion for the SC480 base unit and optional external PAs.
If battteries are used as backup, their cabling is routed to the PDE.
The present manual contains high level information on only one of two
manufacturer’s of the PDE.
IMPORTANT
Motorola does not recommend the PDE be used to support
indoor configuration The PDE is not configurable for
indoor sites, and in general, it does not locate surge
protection functions appropriately for indoor cellsites.
For indoor, power and surge protection functions should be
implemented according to Standards and Guidelines for
Communication Sites using telecom–grade third party
equipment that is available through the ancillary group.
Figure 4-22: PDE and Heat Exchanger
PDE
Brackets for
Antenna Surge
Arrestors
HX
ti–cdma–wp–00336–v01–ildoc–ah
4-32
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Electrical
The PDE is powered by AC voltage (customer supplied) in the range
154–286 VRMS at 47–63 Hz at 3100 Watts.
The PDE outputs –54 Vdc at 2000 Watts (China).
The PDE outputs +30 VDC at 2000 Watts (Domestic)
Batteries if used, are located in a customer supplied external cabinet.
Environmental
The following lists the environmental requirements of the PDE:
Operate Temperature: –40° to +50°C
Storage Temperature: –40° to +60°C
Operating/Storage Humidity: 10 to 95%, non–condensing
Cold Start: –40° to 0°C
Seismic: Per Telecordia GR–63–CORE Zone 4
Weight
S PDE: 52 kg (115 lbs)
–
–
–
–
PDE cabinet: 25 kg (55 lbs)
Heat Exchanger: 12 kg (26 lbs)
Power Supply Module (PSM): 5 kg (11 lbs)
Miscellaneous: 10 kg (22 lbs)
Figure 4-23: PDE Conduit Location
ti–cdma–wp–00338–v01–ildoc–ah
1 – PDE Power Input (AC)
2 – Compact PA #1 Power (DC)
3 – Compact PA #2 Power (DC)
4 – Compact PA #1 Signal (TP)
5 – Compact PA #2 Signal (TP)
MAY 2004
6 – Battery Power (DC & TP)
7 – Expansion PDE (TP)
8 – TME Power (DC)
9 – PDE Signal (TP)
10 – Customer I/O (TP)
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-33
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
PDE Conduit Sizes
The following are the conduit sizes required for connecting to the PDE.
Reference Figure 4-23.
Table 4-18: Conduit Sizes
No.
4-34
Designation
Required Size
(Inches)
PDE Power Input
3/4
Compact PA #1 Power
1/2
Compact PA #2 Power
1/2
Compact PA #1 Signal
1/2
Compact PA #2 Signal
1/2
Battery Power
1–1/2
Expansion PDE
1–1/2
TME Power
TME Signal
1–1/2
10
Customer I/O
1–1/2
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Figure 4-24: PDE Detail
Power Management
Alarms Card (PMAC)
Punch Block
DC Output
Terminal Block
AC Terminal Block
ti–cdma–wp–00359–v01–ildoc–ah
Power Supply
Module
DC Circuit Breakers
Could be buttons or
switches
ti–cdma–wp–00345–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-35
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Materials
Tools
The following tools are required to install the PDE:
Torque Screwdriver
Drill, 3/8–inch or 1/2–inch drive
Appropriate concrete or wood drill Bits
Tie–wraps
Alarms connector, 8–pin in–line, (Tyco, part number 103958–7)
customer supplied
S Bucklestrap Cutting Tool (Motorola P/N 6604809N01) for pole
mounting bracket assembly
PDE Installation
Figure 4-25 shows the Wall Mounting Bracket. and Mounting Bracket
Assembly.
Figure 4-25: Wall Mounting Bracket and Pole Mounting Bracket Assembly
Slots for hangging the TME
Isolation
Washer
Pole
Mounting
Straps
Shoulder
Washer
M6 Screw
Pole Rest
Isolation
Pad
4-36
ti–cdma–wp–00317–v01–ildoc–ah
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Mounting Bracket Assembly
Procedure
Pole Mount
Follow the procedure in Table 4-19 to install the pole mounting bracket
assembly and wall mounting bracket for pole mounting the PDE.
WARNING
Once PDE is installed, DO NOT use it as a step ladder. It
will not support a person standing on top or hanging from
it.
Table 4-19: Procedure to Install Mounting Bracket Assembly on a Pole
Step
Action
Wrap the mounting bracket straps around the pole to gauge the proper length.
Cut straps to proper length.
Slide straps through slots in mounting bracket assembly.
Secure mounting bracket to pole using the straps.
Secure Wall Mounting Bracket to Pole Mounting Bracket Assembly using 8 M6 bolts. Torque bolts to
3.4 N–M (30 in–lbs).
n WARNING
The PDE weighs 15 kg (30 lbs). One person can mount the PDE. It is recommended that a minimum
of two people or one person using a mechanical lift mount the PDE.
Remove the Heat Exchanger prior to mounting the PDE.
NOTE
Initial height is determined by customer. Minimum height from the ground is 1 meter.
Hang PDE on Wall Mounting Bracket and secure using 4 M6 screws. Torque screws to 3.4 N–M (30
in–lbs).
Wall Mount
Follow the procedure in Table 4-20 to install the Wall Mounting Bracket
on a wall for the PDE.
WARNING
Once PDE is installed, DO NOT use it as a step ladder. It
will not support a person standing on top or hanging from
it.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-37
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Table 4-20: Procedure to Install the Wall Mounting Bracket on a Wall
Step
Action
Select a suitable wall position such that the bottom of the PDE is a minimum of 1 meter above the
ground.
NOTE
Check site documentation for further information.
Position Wall Mounting Bracket on wall and mark hole locations.
Drill starter holes for the anchor bolts.
Secure Wall Mounting Bracket to wall using 8 M6 anchor bolts. Torque anchor bolts to 3.4 N–M (30
in–lbs).
Unlock and open PDE side door and remove Power Converter.
NOTE
Screw to secure PDE to Wall Mounting Bracket can only be seen with Power Converter removed.
n WARNING
The PDE (less HX) weighs 25 kg (55 lbs) . It is recommended that a minimum of two people or one
person using a mechanical lift mount the PDE.
Remove Heat Exchanger prior to mounting the PDE.
Hang PDE on Wall Mounting Bracket.
Secure PDE to Wall Mounting Bracket using 4 M6 screws. Torque screws to 3.4 N–M (30 in–lbs). See
Figure 4-26.
Install Power Converter after PDE is secure to Wall Mounting Bracket.
Figure 4-26: PDE Mounting Screw Locations
Screw Hole Location
4-38
Screw can only be inserted if the
Power Converter is first removed.
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Heat Exchanger
The Heat Exchanger (HX) is attached to the PDE and provides
temperature regulation. Figure 4-27 shows the HX.
Figure 4-27: PDE Heat Exchanger Dimensions
140 mm
700 mm
300 mm
ti–cdma–wp–00339–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-39
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Heat Exchanger Details
Figure 4-28 shows the main components of the HX.
Figure 4-28: PDE Heat Exchanger Detail
Internal Shield removed for clarity
Internal Loop
Exhaust Blower
Core
Controller
Internal Loop
Inlet Blower
Heat Exchanger Installation
Follow the procedure in Table 4-21 to install the Heat Exchanger.
Table 4-21: Procedure to Install the Heat Exchanger
Step
Action
NOTE
The HX weighs 12 kgs (26 lbs). One person is able to lift the HX and place it on the PDE.
Once PDE is securely attached, place HX on hinges on the PDE.
Connect Ground and DC/Alarm power, and RS232 Alarm cables. The Test connector should be
connected to a load.
table continued on next page
4-40
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Table 4-21: Procedure to Install the Heat Exchanger
Step
Action
Use tie–wraps to dress cables as necessary.
Ensure that HX swings freely on the hinges and does not pinch and cables.
Figure 4-29: PDE and Heat Exchanger
Internal Shields removed for clarity
ti–cdma–wp–00342–v01–ildoc–ah
PDE Cabling
Table 4-22 shows the cabling pin–outs of the multiple layout
punchblock for the PDE. Consult manufacturer’s installation
specification for connecting wires to the punch block.
Use punchdown tool provided or an equivalent 110 punchdown tool.
Table 4-22: PDE Punchblock Wiring Descriptions
Unit Interface
Customer Input
Signal
Wire Color
PB
Pin
CDI_1
101T
CDI_1_RTN
101R
CDI_2
102T
CDI_2_RTN
102R
Output Pin
table continued next page
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-41
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Table 4-22: PDE Punchblock Wiring Descriptions
Unit Interface
Customer Output
Signal
Wire Color
PB
Pin
CDI_3
103T
CDI_3_RTN
103R
CDI_4
104T
CDI_4_RTN
104R
CDI_5
105T
CDI_5_RTN
105R
CDI_6
106T
CDI_6_RTN
106R
CDI_7
107T
CDI_7_RTN
107R
CDI_8
108T
CDI_8_RTN
108R
CDO NC_0
109T
CDO COM_0
109R
CDO NO_0
110T
CDO NC_1
110R
CDO COM_1
201T
CDO NO_1
201R
CDO NC_2
202T
CDO COM_2
202R
CDO NO_2
203T
CDO NC_3
203R
CDO COM_3
204T
CDO NO_3
204R
CDO NC_4
205T
CDO COM_4
205R
CDO NO_4
206T
CDO NC_5
206R
CDO COM_5
207T
CDO NO_5
207R
CDO NC_6
208T
Output Pin
table continued next page
4-42
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Table 4-22: PDE Punchblock Wiring Descriptions
Unit Interface
RGPS
Combined Compact
Linear Power
Amplifier 1
Power Management
Enclosure
Signal
Wire Color
PB
Pin
CDO COM_6
208R
CDO NO_6
209T
CDO NC_7
209R
CDO COM_7
210T
CDO NO_7
210R
DATA_FROM_HEAD_POS
301T
SYNC_FROM_HEAD_POS
301R
SYNC_TO_HEAD_POS
302T
DATA_TO_HEAD_POS
302R
RGPS_+28V
303T
RGPS_+28V
303R
DATA_FROM_HEAD_NEG
304T
SYNC_TO_HEAD_NEG
304R
SYNC_TO_HEAD_NEG
305T
DATA_TO_HEAD_NEG
305R
RGPS RTN
306T
RGPS RTN
306R
CLPA_485_TX_ACT_P
307T
CLPA_485_TX_ACT_P
307R
CLPA_485_ADD_0
308T
CLPA_485_TX_A_P
308R
CLPA_485_TX_A_N
309T
GROUND
309R
CLPA_485_RX_A_P
320T
CLPA_485_RX_A_N
310R
PDE_AC_FAILURE
401T
PDE_DOOR_ALARM
401R
PDE_HARD_FAILURE
402T
PDE_SOFT_FAILURE
402R
PDE_PRESENCE
403T
PDE_ALARM_RTN
403R
Output Pin
table continued next page
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-43
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Table 4-22: PDE Punchblock Wiring Descriptions
Unit Interface
Signal
1X Span Line
Battery Backup
Combined Compact
Linear Power
Amplifier 2
DO Span Line
Wire Color
PB
Pin
RX_RING_NET_A
404T
RX_TIP_NET_A
404R
TX_RING_NET_A
405T
TX_TIP_NET_A
405R
RX_RING_NET_B
406T
RX_TIP_NET_B
406R
TX_RING_NET_B
407T
TX_TIP_NET_B
407R
RX_RING_NET_C
408T
RX_TIP_NET_C
408R
TX_RING_NET_C
409T
TX_TIP_NET_C
409R
UNUSED
410T
UNUSED
410R
BAT_TP1_PRESENCE_DET
502T
BATT_TP1_PRESENCE_RTN
502R
BATT_TP2_+VE
503T
BATT_TP2_–VE
503R
BATT_TP2_PRESENCE_DET
504T
BAT_TP2_PRESENCE_RTN
504R
CLPA_485_TX_ACT_P
505T
CLPA_485_TX_ACT_P
505R
CLPA_485_ADD_0
506T
CLPA_485_TX_A_P
506R
CLPA_485_TX_A_N
507T
GROUND
507R
CLPA_485_RX_A_P
508T
CLPA_485_RX_A_N
508R
RX_RING_NET_1
509T
RX_TIP_NET_1
509R
TX_RING_NET_1
510T
Output Pin
table continued next page
4-44
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Power Distribution Enclosure Installation – continued
Table 4-22: PDE Punchblock Wiring Descriptions
Unit Interface
MAY 2004
Signal
Wire Color
PB
Pin
TX_TIP_NET_1
510R
RX_RING_NET_2
601T
RX_TIP_NET_2
601R
TX_RING_NET_2
602T
TX_TIP_NET_2
603R
RX_RING_NET_3
603T
RX_TIP_NET_3
603R
TX_RING_NET_3
604T
TX_TIP_NET_3
604R
Output Pin
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-45
Earth Ground Cabling
Objective
The objective of this procedure is to attach the earth ground cabling to
the BTS.
Indoor Grounding
Considerations
Refer to the site documentation for other grounding considerations.
Rack Electrical Isolation on Concrete Slab – The onluy BTS and
cCLPA grounding permitted is through the power cable and chassis
ground connection. If the rack is installed on a concrete slab, it must be
electrically isolated from the slab. The rack should be placed on a
dielectric pad and the seismic mounting bolts should be installed through
the rack with dielectric isolating washers as is done with the BTS frame.
If this method cannot be used, the BTS must be electrically isolated from
the equipment rack.
Cable Description
The following cables in Table 4-23 are necessary to do this procedure.
Table 4-23: Ground Cable and Lug Description and Part Number
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Description
Customer
Supplied
Ground cable, 6 -AWG, insulated copper wire.
Customer
Supplied
Two Hole, Long Barrel lug connector, 6 AWG, 1/4–inch diameter,
5/8–inch stud hole spacing, 13/32 Tang width (ILSCO P/N
CRB–6L2–14–58)
Customer
Supplied
1–inch, 1–1/2–inch, 1/2–inch, and 3/4–inch metallic sealtight type
conduit or RF Solid Shielded cable – Sufficient quantity to meet the
outdoor site and local code requirements
Required Tools and Materials
The following tools are required to attach ground cabling to the BTS.
4-46
Torque wrench set to 5.0 N–M (44 in–lbs) and 13 mm socket
Flathead screwdriver bit
2 M6x10 screws for ground lug
Crimping tool
Anti–Oxidant grease, copper/aluminium mix (Penetrox, part number
P8A)
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Earth Ground Cabling – continued
BTS Ground Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 4-24 to attach the ground cable.
Table 4-24: Procedure to Attach the Earth Ground Cable
Step
Action
NOTE
Due to variability in rack placement, the rack is isolated from ground to reduce the chances of creating
ground loops.
Retrieve ground lug and cabling.
1a
Using a wire stripper, trim back 1/2–inch of the ground cable insulation from each end.
1b
Using a crimp tool crimp the lug onto one end of the cable.
1c
Attach the ground clamp to the opposite end of the ground cable.
Using two screws attach the ground cable and lug to the BTS. See Figure 4-31.
Slide ground clamp over ground anchor and secure using a lockwasher. Use a 13mm socket to tighten
the hex nut. Use a torque wrench to tighten hex nut to 5.0 N–M (44 in–lbs).
Use tie–wraps as required to dress the ground cable, unless conduit is used.
Figure 4-30: Detail Location of Ground Studs
TME
+0V
–48V
20A
GROUND LOCATION
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-47
Earth Ground Cabling – continued
Figure 4-31: Grounding Location on BTS
P/O BTS RF Panel
GROUND LUG
GROUND SCREW
HOLES
M6 SCREWS
Outdoor Grounding
Considerations
cCLPA
The cCLPAs are designed to mount directly to the antenna tower. They
have primary lightning protection on all terminations. There is a ground
stud provided to connect the unit to the tower. If the cCLPAs are not
mounted on the tower, they should be mounted as close as possible to an
antenna ground system connection. All interconnect cables should be in
conduit or solid shield RF cables.
PDE
The Primary PDE is the master ground point for all the outdoor
equipment. This Primary PDE should be mounted within 2 meters of
the master ground connection of the antenna ground system. The
secondary PDE should be mounted within 1 meter of the primary PDE
and single point grounded to the same master ground point.
Compact BTS and TME
The Compact BTS and TME and all other outdoor expansion hardware
should be located within 5 meters of the primary PDE. They are all to
be single point grounded to the system master ground. All these
expansion enclosures are insulated from ground through their respective
mounting brackets. All interconnect cables should be in conduit or solid
shield RF cables. It is recommended that these cables be run in
raceways to reduce the loop dimensions of the cable runs. This
minimizes the effect of inducted currents caused by the intense
electromagnetic field of lightning current.
Antennas
The Compact BTS is being installed at an antenna site that has a proper
ground system for the antenna. Proper ground connection points are also
available for the cCLPA and PDE units.
4-48
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Earth Ground Cabling – continued
Site Requirements
The enclosures are mounted according to the site documentation. Refer
to Figure 2-10, Figure 2-13 through Figure 2-15 for dimensions and
clearances and spacing information.
Figure 4-32 shows an example of a mounted single system outdoor
grounding diagram. Figure 4-33 shows an example of a mounted
multiple unit system outdoor grounding diagram.
Outdoor Grounding Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 4-25 to set up a site for grounding.
Table 4-25: Procedure to Ground an Outdoor Site
Step
Action
If not already known, consult site documentation for location to mount system.
Verify that all master ground for the system is in place.
Follow the procedures as described in Chapter 4 for installing the PDE, TME, and cCLPA.
Once installation is complete, ground the Primary PDE to the system master ground.
Route grounding cables from the other enclosures to the Primary PDE. Apply anti–oxidant grease to
ground lugs and connections.
* IMPORTANT
In order to route the TME to PDE Earth ground cable through the power conduit, a jumper cable must
be spliced from the conduit ground bushing to the earth cable.
Ground the cCLPA to the system master ground. Apply anti–oxidant grease to ground lug and
connection.
Ground the antennas to the system master ground.
Once grounding is completed, layout conduit or solid shield RF (SSRF) cables.
Route wires from PDE through conduit or route SSRF cables to the TME.
10
Route Data cabes from the TME to the cCLPAs.
11
Route AC power and battery backup (if used) to PDE.
12
Route DC power from PDE to cCLPA and TME.
13
Perform the procedures described in the remainder of this Chapter.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-49
Earth Ground Cabling – continued
Figure 4-32: Typical Outdoor Grounding Configuration
ANTENNA
TOWER
LEGEND:
1. PSA – Primary Surge Arrestor
2. SSA – Secondary Surge Arrestor
3. CDT – Conduit
4. SLD – Shielded Cable
5. EGD – Earth Ground
6. TWR – Tower Ground
ANTENNAS
TME and PDE are electrically
isolated from ground.
In addition, there are shielded RF
cables connecting the TME and
PDE.
TWR
GPS
SLD
SLD
TWR
The TME to PDE Earth ground cable
can be routed through the power
conduit as long as a jumper cable is
spliced from the conduit ground
bushing to the earth cable
PSA
cCLPA
CDT
TME
EGD
CDT
PSA
SSA
PDE
PSA
EGD
POWER and DATA LINES
EGD
SINGLE POINT
MASTER GROUND
4-50
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Earth Ground Cabling – continued
Figure 4-33: Typical Multiple Outdoor Grounding Configuration
LEGEND:
1. PSA – Primary Surge Arrestor
2. SSA – Secondary Surge Arrestor
3. CDT – Conduit
4. SLD – Shielded Cable
5. EGD – Earth Ground
6. TWR –Tower Ground
7. TSA –Tertiary Surge Arrestor
ANTENNA
TOWER
ANTENNAS
NOTE:
TME and PDE are electrically
isolated from ground.
In addition, there are shielded RF
cables connecting the TME and
PDE.
TWR
SLD
SLD
TWR
The TME to PDE Earth ground cable
can be routed through the power
conduit as long as a jumper cable is
spliced from the conduit ground
bushing to the earth cable
GPS
PSA
TME 2
CDT
TSA
cCLPA
EGD
CDT
TME 3
TME 1
TSA
TSA
EGD
EGD
PSA
CDT
CDT
SSA
PDE 2
PDE 1
CDT
PSA
PSA
EGD
POWER and DATA LINES
EGD
SINGLE POINT
MASTER GROUND
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-51
Earth Ground Cabling – continued
PDE Ground Connection
Figure 4-34 shows the ground location for the starter PDE and the other
outdoor enclosures.
Figure 4-34: Rear View of PDE
NOTE:
1. in a multiple unit setup,
all the grrounds are
connected to the rear
of the PDE (Starter).
2. 8 point microdocument
GROUND Location
ti–cdma–wp–00356–v01–ildoc–ah
4-52
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
BTS DC Power Cabling
Objective
The objective of this procedure is to attach the DC input cable to the
BTS for indoor configuration.
WARNING
This equipment uses dangerous voltages and is capable of
causing death. Use extreme caution when handling and
testing this equipment.
DC Cable Description
The following cable in Table 4-26 is necessary to do this procedure.
Table 4-26: DC Input Cable Description and Part Number
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Description
Customer
Supplied
DC input cable with crimped lugs, 10 AWG, 10 m, designed to handle
either –60 to –40 VDC or +20 to +34 VDC power input.
7687717T02
Ferrite, Clip–on core
Power Cable and Connector
Signal Information
The DC input connector is located on the bottom, right side rear of the
BTS. The BTS is designed for –60 to –40 VDC.
The TME DC power connection is for outdoor configuration and only in
use if the Thermal Management Enclosure (TME) is used.
IMPORTANT
Motorola does not recommend the PDE be used to support
indoor configuration The PDE is not configurable for
indoor sites, and in general, it does not locate surge
protection functions appropriately for indoor cellsites.
For indoor, power and surge protection functions should be
implemented according to Standards and Guidelines for
Communication Sites using telecom–grade third party
equipment that is available through the ancillary group.
Procedure
Use the following procedure in Table 4-27 to connect the DC voltage
input cable to the BTS. Refer to Figure 4-35.
Table 4-27: Procedure to Connect DC Power to the BTS
Step
Action
Ensure that DC power source circuit breaker is disengaged (OFF).
Route DC power cables to the rear of the BTS.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-53
BTS DC Power Cabling (Indoor) – continued
Table 4-27: Procedure to Connect DC Power to the BTS
Step
For the –48 VDC version, proceed to step 3a.
For the +27 VDC version, proceed to step 3c.
3a
Connect the “+” wire (red) to the +0 V terminal.
3b
Connect the “–” wire (blue) to the –48V terminal. Proceed to step 4.
3c
Connect the “–” wire (black) to the RTN terminal.
3d
Connect the “+” wire (red) to the +27 V terminal. Proceed to step 4.
Bundle wires together and place ferrite core around wires. Ensure that the wires are not being pinched
before closing and latching the ferrite core.
Slide ferrite core as close to the BTS connection as possible without causing stress. Use a tie–wrap on
the ferrite core side away from the connection. The tie–wrap holds the ferrite core in place.
Figure 4-35: DC Power Terminal Strip
For +27VDC, 25 A would
be indicated on the
escutheon and circuit
breaker
TME
+0V
20A
–48V
Action
For +27VDC, +27 V and RTN
would be indicated on the
escutcheon
NOTE:
1. The TME DC power connection is not
in use unless a TME is used.
2. A surge suppressor is recommended
between the BTS and the DC power
source.
SURGE
SUPPRESSOR or
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
DC Power from
source
4-54
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
BTS DC Power Cabling – continued
Connect DC Power to TME
Procedure
Use the following procedure in Table 4-28 to connect the DC voltage
input cable to the TME. Refer to Figure 4-36 or Figure 4-37.
Table 4-28: Procedure to Connect DC Power to the BTS
Step
Action
Ensure that DC power from PDE is disengaged (ciruit breaker set to OFF).
Route DC power cable through conduit to TME POWER Cable hole location.
Ensure that 1U and TME circuit breakers are disengaged (pulled out).
Remove protective cover from PDA DC power connector.
If not already done, trim insulation back about 15 mm (1/2–in) on each wire.
Connect the “+” wire (red) to the +0 VDC terminal on PDA.
Connect the “–” wire (blue) to the –48VDC terminal on PDA.
Replace protective cover.
Figure 4-36: TME Power Distribution Assembly for –48VDC
TME
25A Circuit
Breaker
1U
3A Circuit
Breaker
–48VDC +0VDC
DC Power
Connection
Ground
Location
NOTE:
1 A surge suppressor is recommended
between the BTS and the DC power
source.
SURGE
SUPPRESSOR or
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
DC Power from
source
MAY 2004
ti–cdma–wp–00348–v01–ildoc–ah
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-55
BTS DC Power Cabling (Indoor) – continued
TME
30A Circuit
Breaker
1U
3A Circuit
Breaker
+27VDC +0VDC
DC Power
Connection
Ground
Location
NOTE:
1 A surge suppressor is recommended
between the BTS and the DC power
source.
ti–cdma–wp–00348–v01–ildoc–ah
Figure 4-37: TME Power Distribution Assembly for +27VDC
Captive
Screw
1U
Circuit
Breaker
FRONT
+27 VDC
Connector
Socket
TME Circuit
Breaker
(Rocker Style)
Captive
Screw
Ground
Location
SURGE
SUPPRESSOR or
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
DC Power from
source
4-56
ti–cdma–wp–00348–v01–ildoc–ah
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
AC / DC Power Cabling Installation
Objective
The objective of this procedure is to install the AC power cabling and
Battery Backup input cables to the Power Distribution Enclosure (PDE).
CAUTION
This equipment uses dangerous voltages and is capable of
causing death. Use extreme caution when handling and
testing this equipment.
Earth connection is essential before connecting the power
due to the presence of high earth leakage current.
AC Cable Description
NOTE
The Power Distribution Enclosure (PDE) is UL rated at 14
Amperes, in the range 200–240 VAC. The Customer Site
installation must provide a disconnect device and over
current protection device. A breaker size of 25 Amperes is
recommended or as appropriate by local electrical code.
The frame can accommodate an AC conductor range of 6
AWG to 12 AWG, as limited by the internal AC terminal
block. Cable sizing should be determined by Local
Electrical Codes, using 90C min rated conductors, with
derating for 50C operation. Motorola recommends not less
than 10AWG copper for buried/raceway cables.
The cables listed in Table 4-29 are recommended for this installation.
However, consult the manufacturer’s installation guide for further
information.
Table 4-29: AC Input Cable Description and Part Number
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Customer
Supplied
AC power cable with crimped lugs, 10 AWG, copper, designed for
200 to 240 VAC @ 25 A.
{L
2–7
Customer
Supplied
DC power cables, 10 AWG, stranded, designed for –60 to –40 VDC
power input
Description
Length of cables are dependent upon BTS equipment site layout.
AC and DC Power Cabling
Procedure
After PDE is installed, connect the AC and DC power cables according
to the manufacturer’s installation specification.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-57
AC / DC Power Cabling Installation (Outdoor) – continued
Battery Backup Power Cabling
Procedure
After PDE is installed, connect the Battery Backup DC power cable to
the PDE according to the manufacturer’s installation specification.
PDE to TME and cCLPA DC
Power Cabling Procedure
After PDE is installed, connect the DC power cables from the TME and
cCLPA according to the manufacturer’s installation specification.
4-58
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Antenna Cabling
Objective
The objective of this procedure is to install the cabling for the
antenna(s). This cabling is installed between the unit and the
customer–supplied lightning arrestor(s). If lightning arrestor(s) are not
required, the cabling connects directly to the antenna(s).
Cable Descriptions
The following cables in Table 4-30 are necessary to do this procedure.
Table 4-30: Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
1–6*
Andrew
LDF4–50
Customer
Supplied
Description
RF Cable, 800 MHz, length selections: 10 m (31 ft.)
* Four antenna cables are required if one cCLPA is used. Six are required if two cCLPAs are used.
Procedure
Install the cabling between the BTS, external lightning arrestors, and the
cCLPA. If lightning arrestors are not present, the cables connect to the
antenna.
Cable the BTS as shown in Figure 4-38. Torque the connectors to 4.3
N–M (38 in–lbs).
Perform the procedure in Table 4-31 to install the antenna cables.
Table 4-31: Procedure to Install Antenna Cables
Step
Action
Check with site documentation to determine proper location for mounting antennas.
If used, connect lightning arrestors.
With cCLPA configuration, proceed to step 4.
Without cCLPA configuration, proceed to step 6.
Route antenna cables to cCLPAand Compact BTS. See Figure 4-38 or Figure 4-39. Proceed to step 7.
Route antenna cables between cCLPA and Compact BTS. See Figure 4-38 or Figure 4-39. Proceed to
step 7.
5a
If a TME is used (outdoor configuration), route antenna cables to appropriate TME connectors.
Route antenna cables to Compact BTS. See Figure 4-40. Proceed to step 7.
Dress cables as necessary, unless conduit is used.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-59
Antenna Cabling – continued
Figure 4-38: Antenna Cabling (With cCLPA)
Antenna B
+0V
TME
–48V
20
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
(B)
(B)
Antenna A
50–Ohm
Loads
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
(B)
(B)
4-60
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Antenna Cabling – continued
Figure 4-39: Antenna Cabling with 2 cCLPAs
(B)
(B)
(B)
+0V
TME
–48V
20
(B)
50–Ohm
Loads
Antenna A
cCLPA 1
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
(B)
Antenna B
cCLPA 2
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
(B)
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-61
Antenna Cabling – continued
Figure 4-40: Antenna Cabling (Without cCLPA)
Antenna B
Antenna A
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
(B)
(B)
4-62
+0V
TME
–48V
20
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Span Line, RGPS, and RF GPS Cabling
Objective
The objective of this procedure is to install the span line and RGPS
cabling.
Cable Labels
The cable designations are referenced to Table 3-1 in the “Cable
Description” area of this chapter.
Required Tools and Materials
Table 4-32 provides the quantities and descriptions of the cables.
Table 4-32: List of Required Cables
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Description
T472AA
RGPS cable, 15 m (50 ft.)
T472AB
RGPS cable, 38 m (125 ft.)
T472AC
RGPS cable, 76 m (250 ft.)
T472AD
RGPS cable, 152 m (500 ft.)
T472AE
RGPS cable, 304 m (1000 ft.)
T472AF
RGPS cable, 608 m (2000 ft.)
C1
3086433H07
Punchblock to CBIO Board, 15 pin D–connector on one end and
loose wires on the other end.
Customer Supplied
Span cable, 4 or 8 conductors, 24–28 AWG stranded, twisted pair
J*
SGRG4030
RF–GPS Cable, 1/2–inch coaxial, length = 50 ft. Two male N–type
connectors, one end to be terminated after routing of cable
1–2**
7687717T02
Ferrite, clip–on core
* An SMA to N adapter is required; otherwise a cable must be made with an SMA connector on one end.
** Attach one ferrite bead per bundle of 3 (or less) span lines and one for RGPS cable. Ferrite core is not
required for RF–GPS cable.
Connecting the Span Line
Cable
The BTS provides for three 1X T1/E1 span lines and three MCC–Data
Only (MCC–DO) span lines (See Figure 4-41). Each interface is made
up of Transmit Tip/Ring and Receive Tip/Ring connections.
The Transmit and Receive data flow is given from the perspective of the
BTS.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-63
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continued
Figure 4-41: Span and RGPS Cabling Details
Ferrite
Beads
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
C1
Surge
Protected
Punchblock
(Customer
supplied)
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
NOTE:
Ferrite Beads are used in
indoor configuration only.
ti–cdma–wp–00311–v01–ildoc–ah
4-64
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continued
Cable Pin and Signal
Information for Span Cabling
Table 4-33 gives the pin and signal information for the Span cable.
Table 4-33: Pin/Signal Information for Span Cable
BTS Interface
Span Line Cable
Pin
Wire/Stripe
Color
Description
White/Orange
Orange
White/Green
Blue
White/Blue
Green
NC
White/Brown
NC
Brown
NC
RX RING
RX TIP
NC
TX RING
TX TIP
Span Cable Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 4-34 to connect the span cable.
Table 4-34: Procedure to Install 1X or DO Span Cable
Step
Action
If BTS is configured for 1X operation, proceed to step 1a.
If BTS is confgiured for DO operation, proceed to step 1b.
1a
Route 1X span line (Cable D) from site interface panel and connect to Network Span Group 1X
(1X–A) connector at the rear of the BTS.
1b
Route DO span line (Cable D) from DO site interface panel and connect to Network Span Group 1 DO
(DO–A) connector at the rear of the BTS.
If cable must be made, insert wires into RJ48 connector per Table 3-5.
If more than one span cable is used, bundle them together and place ferrite core around cables. Ensure
that the cables are not being pinched before closing and latching the ferrite core.
Slide ferrite core as close to the connectors as possible without causing stress. Use a tie–wrap on the
ferrite core side away from the connectors. The tie–wrap holds the ferrite core in place
Secure cable to rack using tie–wraps, be sure to leave some slack.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-65
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continued
Connecting Customer–Defined
Inputs to the CBIO
The unit provides eight customer–defined inputs for connection to
external contacts. Each input (a signal/ground pair) is monitored for an
“OPEN” (>50 k Ohms) or “CLOSED” (<3 Ohms) condition.
RGPS or RF–GPS Installation
If RGPS is being installed, proceed to Table 4-36. If RF–GPS is being
installed, proceed to Table 3-6.
Cable Pinout
Figure 4-42 shows the connector pins on cables C and C1. Table 4-35
gives the pinout for cable C and C1.
Figure 4-42: Connector Pins Numbering for Cables C and C1
PIN 9
10
11
12
PIN 1
CONNECTOR FOR
CABLE C
CONNECTOR FOR
CABLE C1
Table 4-35: Pinout for Cables C and C1
Cable C
Wire Color
Cable C1
Pin
Signal
Pin
DC Ground 1
Blue–Black
15
Power 1
Blue
DC Ground 2
Yellow–Black
14
10
Power 2
Yellow
Transmit Port (–)
Green–Black
Transmit Port (+)
Green
Receive Port (–)
White–Black
12
Receive Port (+)
White
No Connect
Red–Black
No Connect
table continued on next page
4-66
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continued
Table 4-35: Pinout for Cables C and C1
Cable C
Wire Color
Cable C1
Pin
Signal
Pin
No Connect
Red
No Connect
12
PPS Timing (–)
Brown–Black
10
11
PPS Timing (+)
Brown
Wire colors are the same for both cables.
Procedure to Install the RGPS
Head
The RGPS is connected to the BTS via the RGPS connector on the
CBIO Board. See Figure 4-41.
Site specific characteristics determine the GPS cabling that is installed.
Install each cable by referring to the cabling diagram in Figure 4-41, and
the procedure in Table 4-36. The lightning arrestor connections are
shown in Figure 4-46.
Figure 4-43 and Figure 4-44 show the RGPS head. Be sure to factor in
mounting considerations as described in Chapter 3.
CAUTION
The RGPS head must not make contact with any metal
surface other than the provided hardware. Use only the
equipment provided to mount the RGPS head. Failure to
do so could damage the RGPS head.
Table 4-36: Procedure for Installing the RGPS Head and Cabling
Step
Action
Determine the mounting location.
n WARNING
The structure of the wall should be verified by a qualified structural engineer.
Mounting the RGPS head and hardware to an inadequate wall structure and/or using inadequate
installment methods can result in serious personal injury.
Use the appropriate mounting bolts for the mounting surface and install the two wall mounting
brackets. Refer to Figure 4-43.
Remove RF–GPS cover plate from CBIO Board.
Remove protective connector cover.
Connect cables C and C1 into the punch block, as if they were part of the same cable, cut in the
middle maintaining color code and signal integrity. Connect the same corresponding color on both
sides of the punchblock (see Figure 4-41 and Table 4-35).
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-67
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continued
Table 4-36: Procedure for Installing the RGPS Head and Cabling
Step
Action
Connect RGPS cable (cable C1) to D–connector.
Attach ferrite bead on the cable close to the BTS connector.
Route RGPS cable C (12–pin Deutsch connector) into the pipe.
Mate the 12–pin Deutsch connector of the RGPS Head cable and cable C. Refer to Figure 4-43.
Tighten the spinning flange on the connector a quarter turn to secure the connection.
Insert the pipe into the threaded mount in the RGPS Head and carefully hand–tighten.
Place the assembly into the mounting brackets. Refer to Figure 4-43. Tighten the U–bolt clamps
to secure the assembly.
Figure 4-43: Installing the Remote GPS Head
VIEW A
RGPS HEAD WITH
12 PIN MALE
CONNECTOR
RGPS HEAD
(MOTOROLA PART
NUMBER 0186012H03)1
MATING
CONNECTORS
RGPS INTERFACE
CABLE WITH 12 PIN
FEMALE CONNECTOR
ON ONE END AND
UNTERMINATED WIRE
ON OTHER END
CABLE TO PUNCHBLOCK
(CABLE C)
REFER TO VIEW A
U–BOLTS
NOTE:
1. REPLACEMENT RGPS HEAD
(MOTOROLA PART NUMBER
0186012H04)
CLAMP BRACKETS (2)
CABLE TO PUNCHBLOCK
(CABLE C)
WALL MOUNTING
BRACKETS (2)
4-68
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continued
Figure 4-44: RGPS Head
THREADED MOUNT ADAPTER
12–PIN DEUTSCH TYPE MMP
CONNECTOR
Connecting the RGPS Cable to
Lightning Arrestor
Figure 4-45 is a detail of the RGPS connections. Figure 4-46 is a detail
of the Lightning Arrestor connections.
Figure 4-45: RGPS to SC480 Connection Diagram
RGPS HEAD (MOTOROLA
P/N 0186012H04)
10
D–CONNECTOR
TO BTS
11
12
Green/Black
UNUSED
Red/Black
Red
C1
RGPS CABLE CONNECTOR
(VIEWED FROM CABLE PERSPECTIVE)
CABLE DRAIN
Brown
12
10
Blue
Yellow
Blue/Black
15
Yellow/Black
14
Green
White/Black
White
Brown/Black
Earth Ground
LIGHTNING ARRESTOR
(WNP CGDSO971017AA1
OR EQUIVALENT)
CELL SITE
GROUND =
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-69
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continued
Figure 4-46: RGPS Lightning Arrestor Wiring
Yellow/Black
Yellow
Green
White/Black
White
Brown
Green/Black
Green
White/Black
White
+17V DC Lines
Brown/Black
Yellow
Cable Drain
+17V DC Equipm ent
Red
Yellow/Black
C (RGPS)
TO RGPS
RECEIVER
Cable Drain
Red/Black
Blue
+17V DC Lines
Green/Black
+17V DC Equipment
C1 (RGPS)
TO BTS
UNIT
Blue/Black
+40V DC Lines
Blue
+ 40V DC E quipm ent
Blue/Black
Red/Black
Blue
White/Black 2
White
Green/Black 4
Yellow/Black 8
Blue/Black
Yellow
10
Brown
11
Brown/Black 12
Green
Red
Red/Black
Red
Brown/Black
Brown
EARTH GROUND
MOUNTING PLATE
Connecting the RF–GPS Cable
Figure 4-47 shows the components of the RF–GPS. The RF–GPS is
connected to the BTS via the RF–GPS module through the RGPS
connector on the CBIO Board. See Figure 4-48.
Procedure
Use the procedure in Table 4-37 to install the RF–GPS system.
Table 4-37: Procedure for Installing RF–GPS Antenna and Cabling
Step
Action
Determine the mounting location (see RF–GPS Mounting Considerations, Table 3-8).
Install the mounting kit at the RF–GPS location of choice. Use the appropriate mounting bolts for
mounting surface.
n WARNING
The roof structure on which the mounting pole is attached should be verified by a qualified structural
engineer for the weight of the RF–GPS engine and mounting hardware or under adverse conditions for
the installation area
Mounting the RF–GPS antenna and hardware to an inadequate roof surface and/or using inadequate
installation methods can result in serious injury.
4-70
Attach the RF–GPS head assembly to the post mounting assembly and secure the assembly to the
assembly to the mounting kit using the screws and nuts supplied (see Figure 4-47).
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continued
Table 4-37: Procedure for Installing RF–GPS Antenna and Cabling
Step
Action
Attach the grounding kit to the mounting pole.
Connect one (1) N connector of the 50–feet superflex cable to the N jack of the RF–GPS antenna cable
and route the other end of the cable down to the frame.
If not already done, attach RF–GPS Module to CBIO Board and secure using 4 M4 screws.
Route the cable to the RF–GPS connector at the rear of the BTS.
Connect cable to RF–GPS connector. See Figure 4-48.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-71
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continued
Figure 4-47: RF–GPS Installation and Components
4–IN
NOTE:
1. TOTAL WEIGHT FOR GPS ANTENNA
ASSEMBLY – 0.65 LBS.
3/4–IN
ANTENNA/PREAMP
(CGDSANT62301)
CABLE ASSEMBLY
(N–DSK) (12–IN LONG)
(CGDSMCXNJACK)
RUBBER BOOT
(CGDSANT62301)
MOUNTING SHROUD
(CGDSMNT62311)
1/2–IN SCREWS
OUTER GASKET
(CGDSMNT62311)
3–IN
2”
POST
MOUNTING
ASSEMBLY
(CGDS62312)
CABLE RETAINING NUT
(CGDSMNT62311)
“N” JACK
(CGDSMCXNJACK)
(SEE NOTE 1)
MOUNTING &
GROUNDING KIT
(CGDS2417071)
(CGDSVXL550)
“N” JACK
CONNECTOR
ADJUSTABLE FROM
33.5 TO 47–IN
ROOF
E/K
(FSJ4–50B)
TO BTS
REF TO FW00410R
4-72
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continued
Figure 4-48: Span and RF–GPS Cabling Details
Customer I/O
PWR
RF–GPD IN
EXPANSION FRAME SYNC – OUT
DAISY–CHAIN POWER
SDCX POWER
SDCX KIT NO.
SDCX SERIAL NO.
DAISY–CHAIN SYNC – OUT
ti–cdma–wp–00311–v01–ildoc–ah
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-73
Customer Input / Output Cables
Introduction
The objective of this procedure is to attach the ferrite core onto the
customer input and output cables.
Cable Descriptions and Part
Numbers
Table 4-38 gives the cable descriptions and part numbers used to install
the Customer I/O connectors.
Table 4-38: Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers
Cable
Qty.
Part Number
Customer
Supplied
Molex, terminal
plugs, P/N
39352–0106
Connector, 6 pin
Molex, terminal
plugs, P/N
39352–0108
Connector, 8 pin
Motorola P/N
7687717T02
Core, Ferrite
Customer
Supplied
Tie–wrap
1–3
Description
Customer Input/Output cable, 0–8 conductor, 18–24 AWG, stranded
wire
Customer Input and Output
Connector Pinouts
Input Pinouts
Table 4-39 lists the pinouts for the Customer Input connectors.
Table 4-39: Customer Input Connector Pinouts
Pin Number
Description
Customer Input 1/5
Customer Input 1/5 Return
Customer Input 2/6
Customer Input 2/6 Return
Customer Input 3/7
Customer Input 3/7 Return
table continued on next page
4-74
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Site Cleanup – continued
Table 4-39: Customer Input Connector Pinouts
Pin Number
Description
Customer Input 4/8
Customer Input 4/8 Return
Output Pinouts
Table 4-40 lists the pinouts for the Customer Output connectors.
Table 4-40: Customer Input Connector Pinouts
Pin Number
Description
Customer Output 1/3/5/7 NC
Customer Output 1/3/5/7 C
Customer Output 1/3/5/7 NO
Customer Output 2/4/6/8 NC
Customer Output 2/4/6/8 C
Customer Output 2/4/6/8 NO
Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 4-41 to attach a ferrite core.
Table 4-41: Procedure for Using Ferrite Core on Customer Input and Output Wires
Step
Action
Route Customer I/O cables from termination equipment to rear of BTS and connect.
At the rear of the BTS, just below the top, are three pairs of connectors for customer defined inputs
and outputs. See Figure 4-48.
Connect the cable for Customer Outputs 1 and 2 to BTS connector CUST. OUTPUT 1–2.
Perform the same for the remaining connectors.
After connections are made, bundle the wires of CUST. OUTPUT 1–2 and CUST. OUTPUT 3–4
together and place a ferrite core around them. Ensure that the wires will not be pinched prior to
closing and latching the ferrite core.
Slide ferrite core as close to the BTS connectors as possible without causing stress. Use a tie–wrap on
the ferrite core side away from the BTS connectors to hold the ferrite core in place.
Perform step 4 and step 5 for CUST. OUTPUT 5–6 and CUST. OUTPUT 7–8 and CUST. INPUT
1–4 and CUST. INPUT 5–8.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-75
Site Cleanup
Remove Protective Covering
Remove any anti–static plastic or cloth sheeting that was used to cover
the equipment.
Lighting Fixtures
Remove the masking tape from the fluorescent light fixtures.
Tools
Place all hand and power tools in the installation tool kit or other
appropriate place. Note any tools that need replacement, cleaning, or
adjustment.
Materials
Place any leftover materials in a location specified by the site manager.
Remove Debris
Remove any packing material.
Ensure that all scrap materials have been removed from any tables or
stands.
Clean/sweep the area. Ensure that all alignment marks have been
removed.
Environment
Remove any temporary weather protection used for installation.
Check that the power connections are tight.
Organize any items (manuals, materials, etc.) left on site and place them
in a location specified by the site manager.
Check that the unit lock is secure and key is removed.
Verify that cabling is properly secured between unit and enclosures.
4-76
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Installation Completion Checklist
Directions
Fill out the installation completion checklist and make any necessary
copies. You may copy this check sheet as needed.
Indoor Installation Completion
Checklist
Date Hardware Installation Completed: ________________________
Site:_______________________________________________________
Serial Number(s):__________________________
__________________________________________________________
Checklist Completed By:_____________________________________
Checklist Reviewed By:______________________________________
Table 4-42: Indoor Installation Completion Checklist
Status
No.
Item
Equipment is not damaged.
Air flow clearance requirements are met.
Mounting plate is level and secure. (Indoor)
BTS is securely mounted to plate and rack.
(Indoor)
TME is securely mounted to wall or pole.
(Outdoor)
PDM is installed and cabled within TME.
(Outdoor)
BTS is securely mounted within the TME.
(Outdoor)
BTS is correctly cabled to TME.
1U Module is installed and cabled to TME (If
used).
10
HMS is securely mounted to TME. (Outdoor)
11
HMS is cabled to TME. (Outdoor)
12
PDE is securely mounted to wall or pole.
(outdoor)
13
HX is securely mounted to PDE. (Outdoor)
14
HX is cabled to PDE. (Outdoor)
15
TME, PDE, and cCLPA are grounded.
(Outdoor)
Notes
table continued next page
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-77
Installation Completion Checklist – continued
Table 4-42: Indoor Installation Completion Checklist
Status
No.
Item
16
TME is cabled to PDE and cCLPA through
conduit and conduit hubs on TME are tight.
17
PDE is cabled to TME through conduit and
conduit hubs on PDE are tight.
18
cCLPA is cable to TME through conduit and
and conduit hubs on cCLPA are tight.
19
Conduit is sufficiently grounded.
20
200–240 VAC is connected to PDE.
21
Battery backups (if used) are connected to the
PDE.
22
TME DC power cable is connected (through
conduit) to PDE (Outdoor)
23
cCLPA DC power cable is connected through
conduit) to PDE
24
RGPS head and mast are secure.
25
RGPS head has a clear view of the sky and is
not in a location which accumulates debris.
Make sure the RGPS is located away from
the BTS transmit antenna.
26
Local GPS antenna is secure. (If used)
27
Local GPS cabling is installed (If used).
28
Mounting rack is isolated from the Master
ground. (Indoor)
29
cCLPA is securely mounted to rack (if in
use). (Indoor)
30
Compact BTS connection to the DC source is
secure. (Indoor)
31
cCLPA connection to its DC source is secure.
(Indoor)
32
The antenna connections are secure.
33
The antenna cables are protected by lightning
arrestors (if applicable).
34
Span and RGPS connections are protected by
lightning arrestors (if applicable).
35
The RGPS ground lead is connected to the
BTS digital ground reference.
Notes
table continued next page
4-78
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Installation Completion Checklist – continued
Table 4-42: Indoor Installation Completion Checklist
Status
MAY 2004
No.
Item
36
Installation hardware is removed.
37
The earth ground connections are secure
between the earth ground and the Compact
BTS. (Indoor)
38
The DC input cable is securely attached to the
DC input connector. (Indoor)
39
The BTS–to–cCLPA cabling is secure (if
applicable) (Indoor)
40
cCLPA connection to earth ground is secure
(if cCLPA in use). (Indoor)
41
The antenna N–type connectors are securely
attached to the antenna A and B connectors
(if applicable). (Indoor)
42
All unused ports on BTS and/or cCLPA are
properly terminated. (Indoor)
43
All cables are dressed and tied. (Indoor)
44
Power, Span, Customer I/O, PA, RGPS, and
DO cables to the BTS have a ferrite core
attached and tie–wrapped in place.
45
The external power source (DC) is active.
(Indoor)
46
AC power source is active. (Outdoor)
47
The circuit breaker on the BTS is disengaged
(Pulled out).
48
Circuit breakers are disengaged (Pulled out)
on TME PDM. (Outdoor)
49
Circuit breakers are disengaged (Pulled out)
on PDE. (Outdoor)
50
Circuit breaker is disengaged (Pulled out) on
cCLPA.
51
The site is cleaned, swept and trash removed.
52
The site specific documentation is present at
the site.
Notes
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
4-79
Installation Completion Checklist – continued
Notes
4-80
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Chapter 5: Power Installation
Table of Contents
MAY 2004
Frame Configuration DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Frame Configuration DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion Frame DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion 1 Frame DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion 2 Frame DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion 3 Frame DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-3
Pre–Power Up Test (Indoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power for EV–DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Pre–Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cCLPA DC Power Pre–Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-5
AC Power Input (Outdoor Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
Battery Backup DC Power Input (Outdoor Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-9
Initial Power–Up Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Power–Up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor Configuration Initial Power Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
5-11
5-12
Remove Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing BTS Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing cCLPA Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing PDE Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-14
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004
Frame Configuration DIP Switch
Introduction
This section describes setting the DIP switch positions for starter/single
frame and exapansion frames. The following sections describe BTS
preparation before applying DC power.
Setting Frame Configuration
DIP Switch
The frame configuration switch is located on the Compact BTS
Input/Output (CBIO) Card of the BTS. Figure 5-1 shows the switch
position for a starter /single frame configuration. If there are expansion
frames, then each would have the DIP switch positions set to reflect that
frames identification. See Figure 5-2.
The switch settings must be verified and set before power is applied to
the BTS. Refer to Figure 5-1 or Table 5-1 for a starter or single frame.
Figure 5-1: DIP Switch Configuration
PWR
RF–GPS IN
Frame ID
UP
DN
EXPANSION FRAME SYNC – OUT
3rd and 4th Positions
– Don’t Care
DAISY–CHAIN
POWER
SDCX POWER
Note:
Black represents Switch Actuator
DAISY–CHAIN SYNC – OUT
SDCX
KIT NO.
SDCX
SERIAL NO.
MAY 2004
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
5-1
Frame Configuration DIP Switch
– continued
Table 5-1: Frame ID Switch Position – Single/Starter Frame
UP
UP
––
––
–– = Don’t Care. These switch positions do not affect the BTS.
Expansion Frame DIP Switch
Settings
Figure 5-2 shows the switch position for the expansion frames.
Figure 5-2: Expansion Frames DIP Switch Configuration
Expansion 1
UP
PWR
DN
RF–GPS IN
Expansion 2
UP
DN
Expansion 3
EXPANSION FRAME SYNC – OUT
DAISY–CHAIN
POWER
SDCX POWER
UP
DN
DAISY–CHAIN SYNC – OUT
Note:
Black represents Switch Actuator
SDCX
KIT NO.
SDCX
SERIAL NO.
5-2
3rd and 4th Positions
– Don’t Care
1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU
PRELIMINARY
MAY 2004

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Modify Date                     : 2004:06:11 14:17:11-07:00
Create Date                     : 2004:06:11 14:16:23-07:00
Title                           : print_instructions
Author                          : Win32 user
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Page Count                      : 200
Mod Date                        : 2004:06:11 14:17:11-07:00
Creation Date                   : 2004:06:11 14:16:23-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2004:06:11 14:17:11-07:00
Has XFA                         : No

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Nokia Solutions and Networks T5EJ1 1X SC480 BTS Microcell Base Station Transmitter User Manual print instructions

Nokia Solutions and Networks 1X SC480 BTS Microcell Base Station Transmitter print instructions

Contents

User Manual Part 1

FCC ID Filing: IHET5EJ1

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation